JP2015160109A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suppress a possibility for a player to experience discomfort.SOLUTION: When a specific condition is satisfied, frequency of dynamic display of identification information and a period of dynamic display of each identification information are specified by period specifying means on the basis of progress situations of a privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to excellently perform dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with a period of the privilege game state. That is, it is possible to suppress a possibility that while dynamic display of the identification information is in progress, the privilege game state is over or many hours' gap occurs after dynamic display of all the identification information is over before a privilege game state is over. Thus, it is possible to suppress a possibility for a player to experience discomfort.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  A game machine such as a pachinko machine performs an effect (fluctuation pattern effect) of displaying a plurality of symbols on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, and the stop symbol after the change effect is a predetermined combination. There is something to become. In such a gaming machine, one variation effect mode is determined in accordance with a random value acquired based on one start prize. In addition, when the winning prize is in a winning state or a variable production, the random number value acquired based on the starting prize is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Has been.

  Here, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to predict in advance the mode of the variation pattern based on the stored data, and it is possible to perform a continuous notice effect using the stored data. . This continuous notice effect is continuously noticed that when a change pattern according to the lottery result is a specific change pattern, it becomes a specific effect form over a plurality of changes until the change pattern is executed. It is something to produce. Thereby, a player's sense of expectation can be increased in stages over a plurality of variations.

JP 2005-334273 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, it is difficult to determine a plurality of fluctuations in a period that matches the variable period when a plurality of fluctuations are executed in a state where the period is variable (for example, a hit state). there were. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable due to a problem such as the end timing of the variable period during execution of the variation effect.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous for a player based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the privilege game transition means by the privilege game transition means. Display control means for controlling the display means to dynamically display the identification information when the state is shifted to a state, and a period of dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means. A period specifying unit capable of specifying one or a plurality of times, and the period specifying unit, based on the progress status of the privilege gaming state, when the specific condition is satisfied, The period of the dynamic display of each said identification information is specified.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the period specifying means sets the identification set previously in one of the privilege gaming states when the specific condition is satisfied. Based on each period of dynamic display of information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information is specified one or more times.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a progress status determining means for determining a progress status of the privilege gaming state, wherein the period specifying means is one in the privilege gaming state. The identification information for specifying a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information executed last in the privilege gaming state based on the determination result by the progress status determination means The period of the dynamic display is specified.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. When the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information. The period of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means is specified one or more times by the period specifying means. When a specific condition is satisfied, the number of times of dynamic display of identification information and the period of dynamic display of each identification information are specified by the period specifying means based on the progress status of the privilege gaming state.

  Thereby, the dynamic display of identification information can be suitably performed according to the period of a privilege game state. That is, although the dynamic display of identification information is being executed, the privilege gaming state ends, or the dynamic display of all identification information ends and the privilege gaming state ends for a long time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, a period of dynamic display of identification information by the period specifying means based on each period of dynamic display of identification information set previously in one privilege gaming state Are identified one or more times.

  Thereby, since each period of the dynamic display of the identification information set previously can be referred to, only the long variation pattern effect is continuously set, and the bonus game is ended before the set variation pattern effect ends. It can suppress that a state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the progress status of the privilege gaming state is determined by the progress status determining means. In one award gaming state, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the identification information is specified by the period specifying means, and finally in the award gaming state based on the determination result by the progress state determining means. A period of dynamic display of identification information to be executed is specified.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times can be surely executed in one privilege gaming state, the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed less than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to suppress the end. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main controller, (b) shows typically the correspondence between the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the game result setting table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the clear table at the time of jackpot completion. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the various setting value storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the register typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the pseudo fluctuation selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for final fluctuations. It is the figure which showed typically each table prescribed | regulated to the pseudo fluctuation | variation selection table, and the frequency | count of selection of each fluctuation | variation period. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the progress of pseudo fluctuation and the progress of jackpot when the start timing of the fifteenth pseudo fluctuation is in 6 rounds of jackpot, (b) It is the figure which showed typically the progress situation of pseudo fluctuation, and the progress situation of jackpot when the start timing of the second pseudo change is in seven rounds of jackpot. It is the figure which showed typically the progress situation of pseudo fluctuation, and the progress situation of jackpot when the start timing of the fifteenth pseudo fluctuation is in the jackpot eight rounds. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where the fluctuation pattern effect performed during jackpot is removed. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where the variation pattern effect performed during jackpot is win. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the alerting | reporting effect performed during jackpot. (A), (b) is a continuation of explanatory drawing explaining the alerting | presentation effect performed during jackpot. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the pushbutton effect performed during jackpot. (A), (b) is a continuation of explanatory drawing explaining the push button effect performed during jackpot. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit time setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the game result setting acquisition process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of a loss performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation variation setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the block setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the last variation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the push button effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back surface image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the determination table for the success / failure provided in ROM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous notice random number table provided in ROM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is typical about the content of the shortest period table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern coupling | bonding table. (A), (b) is a figure for demonstrating the change of the period in the case of combining the period allocated to the variation pattern effect performed during jackpot, and setting an effect newly. (A), (b) is a figure for demonstrating the 1st notice in the continuous notice effect performed during jackpot. (A), (b) is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd notice in the continuous notice effect performed during jackpot. (A), (b) is a figure for demonstrating the 3rd notice in the continuous notice effect performed during jackpot. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation variation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notification effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). The opening is repeated 8 times (8 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, “Big Jack D”, “Big Jack E”, and “Big Jack F”. After the end, as a value added after the jackpot, a game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are six types of special jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, “Big Jack D”, “Big Jack E”, and “Big Jack F”. .

  “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot B”, “Big jackpot C”, “Big jackpot D”, “Big jackpot E”, “Big jackpot F” all become special gaming states with 8 rounds (8R jackpot), then As an added value after the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. However, in addition to the above-mentioned added value, the added value after the end of the jackpot is added to the “bonanza A”, “bonanza B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot E”, and “jackpot F”. Are different. Specifically, “Big Jack A” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, and “Big Jack B” Until the lottery finishes 20 times, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases, and “Big Jack C” and “Big Jack D” are normal until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times after the jackpot ends. The probability of winning a symbol increases. “Big jackpot E” increases the probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 70 times. Until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability has increased, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (8R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. This is called the probability variation period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability change period of the special symbol is shown by using the number of lotteries of the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol probability change period is 100 times until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the special symbol probability change period is described as 100 times. In addition, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol, that is, the lottery of the special symbol after the jackpot ends a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20, 50 times, 70 times, The period until the end of (100 times) is usually called a short time period of the symbol. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is indicated by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is 20 times.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common, and depending on the type of jackpot, the “short time of normal symbols” The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Also, for example, instead of changing the period when the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory in the hit of a normal symbol. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A” is completed, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and “Big Jack B” is reached. After the “Big Bonus B”, the regular symbol time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times. When the “Big Jack C” and “Big Jack D” are reached, the special symbol will be displayed after the big jackpot ends. The normal symbol time-saving state continues until the symbol lottery ends 50 times, and when the jackpot type is “Large Bonus E”, after the “Big Jack E” ends, the special symbol time-saving state ends until the special symbol lottery ends 70 times. When the state is continued and becomes “Big Bonus F”, after the “Big Bonus F”, the normal symbol time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The duration may be arbitrarily Sadamere. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed 40 times, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times after the" big hit C "ends. When the “short jackpot D” is continued, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the “jackpot D” until the special symbol lottery ends 80 times. After the “big hit E” is over, the short-time state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. When the “big hit F” is reached, Sen may be a time-shortening condition of normal symbol until the end of 120 times is continued. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. After that, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from a “special symbol low probability state” to a “special symbol high probability state”, regardless of the type of jackpot of that special symbol, the special symbol jackpot ends. Until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. On the other hand, after a special symbol jackpot is reached, the special symbol jackpot is not newly reached until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the 20th special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in this case, until at least 120 lotteries of the 20 special symbol lottery performed before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are completed, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “ordinary symbol short-time state”, the special symbol lottery after the jackpot of the special symbol ends (for example, 10 times, 20 times, 50 times, 70 times, 100 times). On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”. As described above, the predetermined number of times is determined according to the jackpot type of the special symbol. If the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the predetermined number of times is 10, and if the big hit type is “big hit B”, the predetermined number of times is 20 times, if “big hit C” and “big hit D”, the predetermined number of times is 50 times, if “big hit E”, the predetermined number of times is 70 times, and if “big hit F”, the predetermined number of times The number of times is 100.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further changed after the new special symbol jackpot ends. This is continued until the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the number of jackpots is completed. For example, after becoming “big hit A” and moving to “ordinary symbol time-short state”, when “special symbol time-short state” becomes “hit C” in the fifth special symbol lottery, ”Is continued after the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the short time period set after the end of the jackpot is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, the longer the short time period of normal symbols, the more opportunities for balls to pass through the second entrance 67, so there are more opportunities for normal symbols to be drawn, and there are also opportunities to win normal symbols. Become more. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the normal symbol, the stronger a sense of expectation that the player can win a special symbol.

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possession balls or a state where the number of possession balls is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a sense of expectation that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the time period of this normal symbol is staged based on the result of the symbol variation effect (variation pattern effect) displayed on the later-described third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot (special game state). It is set as the structure which alert | reports automatically. Specifically, fluctuating pattern effects are performed 15 times during the jackpot (special gaming state) (see FIG. 20 (a)), and each time the same symbol is aligned by the varying pattern effects, the number of times of short and short times (FIG. 21 ( The number of times (a) where “total” is displayed in (a)) is added (see FIGS. 21A and 21B). The number of times that a symbol is added once is basically 10 times.

  In addition, the count of the number of time reductions is set as an upper limit value for the number of time reductions associated with various jackpots. For example, in the case of “big hit C”, the count value is increased until the total number of times (count value of the number of time reductions) reaches 50 times. Further, when the variation effect has not reached 15 times when the total number of times (the count value of the number of time reductions) has reached 50 times, all of the subsequent variation effects are out of the stop symbol (that is, the same symbol) Is performed in a mode in which the two are not aligned, see FIG. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type.

  In addition, when the total value of the number of time reductions (the number of parts displayed as “total”) added in the 1st to 14th variation effects is less than the time reduction number associated with each jackpot type, the 15th time In the above-described fluctuating effects or the push button effects described later after the fifteenth fluctuating effects, the remaining number of short times is added. For example, in the “big hit F”, when the count value of the short time is displayed as 50 at the end of the 14th variation effect, it is 50 times with respect to the short time 100 associated with the big hit F. Since the short number of times is insufficient, in the fifteenth fluctuating production, the symbols are arranged and 50 additions are notified. Then, 50 times that is the total number up to that time and 50 times that were notified in the fifteenth variation effect are added together, and the count value of the number of time reductions is notified to the player as a total of 100 times. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type. Also, since the player can play with expectation up to the fifteenth fluctuating effect, which is the last fluctuating effect of the big hit, the big hit game is simply an operation for obtaining a ball. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy a game with a big hit.

  In addition, if it is determined that more than one round will be left even if the effect of performing fifteen variations is performed and the effect of notifying the total value of the number of short times added by fifteen variations is performed, a push button Production is performed. That is, the fifteenth variation effect is executed out of the way, and after the variation effect is finished, “total 50 times” is displayed (see FIG. 22A), and then the frame button 22 is continuously provided to the player. Is displayed (see FIG. 24 (b)), and then an additional 50 times is reported (see FIG. 25 (a)). This allows the player to participate in the game by performing the push button effect even if the fluctuating effect for 15 times has ended with one or more rounds remaining. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored later. Further, by performing the push button effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility that the number of times will be increased, so that the jackpot game can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the same symbols are prepared in the first to fourteenth variation effects, the number of time reductions to be added is fixed to 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “5 times” or “20 times” may be selected as the additional number of times. Thereby, in each variation effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the additional number of times that are notified after the symbols are gathered, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Furthermore, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, in order to alert | report to the jackpot the short time period which transfers after the jackpot end as mentioned above, 15 fluctuation | variation effects are performed during jackpot.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A” to “big hit F”, any number (ie, “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) is displayed so that the main symbols to which any of 9) are added are aligned. Also, if “big hit F”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with “7” added to them are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. As a result, even if the jackpot is won, it is impossible to determine the jackpot type depending on the numbers assigned to the main symbols. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation with respect to the variable effects performed during the jackpot. Can be played.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity and are displayed in a variable manner. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. For example, a notice effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67 is being executed by a lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (8 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 8 times (8 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203, and writing various data to the RAM 203, and other interrupt circuit Various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. At least a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, a state setting table 202f, and a big jackpot end clear table 202g are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. Details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 6C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 7A) is a data table in which the determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are set for each display mode. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the determination result of jackpot of special symbols, the gaming state, and the like are defined. Specifically, a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of a big hit and a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of losing are defined. Further, there are three types of tables for selecting the variation pattern at the time of jackpot (selection table for winning hour 202d1 to 202d3), and the table selected for each jackpot type is different. Specifically, in the case of winning the “big hit A”, “big hit B”, or “big hit C”, the mode of the variation pattern is selected from the selection table for winning hour 202d1, and the “big hit D” or “ When winning the “big hit E”, the variation pattern mode is selected from the winning selection table 202d2, and when winning the “big hit F”, the variation pattern mode is selected from the winning selection table 202d3. In these tables, the variation patterns that are easy to select and the variation patterns that are difficult to select are different. As a result, the type of jackpot can be predicted by confirming the mode of the variation pattern to be executed, so that not only the stop pattern after variation but also the mode of the variation pattern should be noted. Can do. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, there are a plurality of tables for selecting a variation pattern at the time of losing (selection table 202d4 for time reduction state, selection table 202d5 for time reduction state 2, selection table 202d6 for winning after), and the lottery result of special symbols is out of place. If there is, one of the tables is selected according to the gaming state.

  The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7 (b)) shows a setting of a stop symbol indicating a jackpot when the jackpot is won, an operation pattern of the specific winning opening (big opening mouth) 65a during the jackpot, etc. It is a data table in which setting values are defined for each jackpot type. The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7B) is stored in the range of addresses “19D1H” to “19EEH” in the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored in each address. In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7B), the number of judgment values (random number values) that are each jackpot type (number of judgment values), lighting patterns (number of display symbols) of the plurality of LEDs 37a, Information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the special winning opening (large opening port) 65a (large opening port pattern), and the winning selection table 202d1 to 202d3 Information indicating which one to use (table selection information) and information (offset) for determining the gaming state after the jackpot ends are defined. In FIG. 7B, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the setting values according to the winning jackpot type are stored in the various setting value storage areas of the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7B). 203e (see FIG. 10). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the setting values stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to the variation pattern effects and jackpots that are jackpots. The various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 10) is based on an offset defined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7B) in addition to a storage area for storing setting values related to the game. An offset value storage area for storing the offset value calculated in this manner is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the gaming state after the jackpot end, and will be described in detail later. It is.

  Specifically, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 42) executed when it is determined that the jackpot end timing, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot end (whether or not to set a high probability state of a special symbol) Is used for selecting from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A) and setting it in various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired along with the ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is kept until the end of the jackpot, and the disturbance The game state after the jackpot is not determined based on the numerical value (counter value), but the random number value (counter value) acquired along with the first entry into the first entrance 64 (start prize) Only the offset value selected based on the jackpot is held in the jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the big hit is determined is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values relating to the gaming state after the jackpot end (setting values indicating whether or not to make a special symbol high probability state, a short time period of a normal symbol, etc.) Instead of being held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of the event or the subsequent big hit state, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of the various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. . Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. Can do.

  Next, the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A) is a table in which game states that can be shifted to after the jackpot end are defined for each offset value, and when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached (S1309). : Yes) is a data table that is referred to in order to set the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot end processing (S1310) executed.

  This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD4H to 1AF3H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored in each address. In this state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A), information (special symbol lottery state) indicating whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, and the short time of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot Information indicating whether or not to shift to a state (ordinary symbol state), a short time period of a normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot (number of short times), a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern mode The special symbol lottery count (variation pattern selection table switching count) required for switching from the table after the jackpot to the table corresponding to the state is defined. In FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is described.

  The information indicating whether or not to shift to the normal symbol time-short state (normal symbol state) is provided with two types of states, a time-short state 1 and a time-short state 2. Regardless of which state is set, after the jackpot ends, the normal symbol shifts to the short time state. The difference between these two states is that the tables used to determine the variation pattern are different from each other after the number of times of variation pattern selection table switching has elapsed. That is, when performing a variation pattern production for detachment, the variation pattern is selected from the selection table 202d4 for the short time state 1 in the short time state 1, and the variation pattern is selected from the selection table 202d5 for the short time state 2 in the short time state 2. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, the jackpot end clear table 202g will be described. The big hit end clear table 202g is a table stored in the range of addresses “1205H” to “1212H” of the ROM 202, and addresses of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 10) are defined for each address. Yes. Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 43) which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses in the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202g. “00H” (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read storage data (address data). If the data read from the big jackpot clear table 202g is “00H”, the zero setting process is terminated. The jackpot end clear table 202g defines only the setting destination address and sets “00H” to the setting destination address in the control program of the MPU 201, so the jackpot end clear table 202g The amount of data can be reduced.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling processing of the main controller 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main controller 110 includes special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and third symbol display. This is a main process of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in the device 81.

  First, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “107” is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. Stored. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are five random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “4, 83, 168, 249, 285” is a special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. Stored in In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random values that are jackpots is 5 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/60”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability and the random hit that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. May be easier. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 39” is “big hit A” and the value is “40 to 69”. Is a jackpot type when the value is “70 to 129”, and is a jackpot C. The jackpot type when the value is “130 to 139” is “jackpot D”, the jackpot type when the value is “140 to 169” is “jackpot E”, and the value is “170 The jackpot type in the case of “˜199” is “jackpot F”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has three types of hits (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, big hit E, big hit F) according to the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Is configured to be determined.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back off” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth off” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” “When various types are defined and any one of the selection tables 202d1, 202d2 and 202d3 for hitting is selected, the variation patterns selected at the same selection ratio are“ various common reach ”,“ common super reach ”,“ In the case of the “special special reach” types defined as the variation patterns that are difficult to be selected in the case of the hit special selection table 202d1, the “special special reach” types are specified, and the hit special selection table 202d1 and the hit hour selection table 202d2 As a variation pattern that is difficult to select, Chi "variety is defined, as the variation pattern of per-off shared," shared normal reach "various," shared super reach "variety, is" shared Special reach "variety are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  In this way, by providing various “special special reach” that are difficult to be selected when the hit selection table 202d1 is selected (that is, in the case of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C), “special special reach” is provided. To the player who recognizes that “has been generated” is expected to win a jackpot of 50 or more times (ie, jackpot D, jackpot E, and jackpot F). it can. In addition, when the selection table for winning hour 202d1 or the selection table for winning hour 202d2 is selected (that is, in the case of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot F), “rare special reach” By providing various types of games, players who have recognized that "Rare Special Reach" has occurred will have a sense of expectation that they will win a 100-hour jackpot (ie, a jackpot F). be able to. Therefore, since the player can predict the jackpot type according to the type of the variation pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Also, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the table used to select the variation pattern differs depending on whether the normal symbol state is the normal state or the time-short state 1 to 3. (Time selection state selection tables 202d4, 202d5 and winning selection table 202d6). By configuring in this way, the types of variation patterns to be executed can be varied, so that the interest of the player in games can be improved.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 6C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is the winning set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 40), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting win, the original special symbol is obtained. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S704 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 30).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display holdings in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 30 and S705 in FIG. 35). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S904 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S805 in FIG. 36).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S905 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S903 in FIG. 37: No).

  The various set value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various set values, flags, counters, and the like for executing the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on data stored in various setting value storage areas 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 10) correspond to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 10), the launch control signal set value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” of the RAM 203 stores a set value for controlling the launch of the sphere. This is an area, and the launch of a ball into the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which setting values of lighting patterns for lighting the display LEDs are stored. Based on the setting values stored in this area. To turn on the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test on a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since it is a test signal, it is set so that no signal is output while the player is playing with the pachinko machine 10 (that is, a state in which “00H” is set as the set value in both test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum number of rounds setting area assigned to the address “F030H” is an area for setting the number of big hits. For example, if the number of rounds of jackpot, such as probabilistic jackpot E, is won for the jackpot type with two rounds, “02H” is set as the setting value, and the number of rounds of jackpot, such as special jackpot A or special jackpot B, is set. When winning 8 rounds of jackpot, “08H” is set as the set value, and when the number of jackpot rounds such as normal jackpot or short-time jackpot A is won, the setting value is “10H” Is set.

  The winning number counter assigned to the address “F031H” is a counter for counting the number of times the winning is made in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big hit, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed when 10 balls are won. It is configured. The winning number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls won in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has become ten.

  The gaming state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the current gaming state is stored. For example, if the stored setting value is “01H”. When the special symbol is changing, “02H” indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed, and “03H” indicates that the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. "04H" indicates that the jackpot is being won and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened. If it is “00H”, it is in a state other than the above (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the state from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol is started, or in the state where there is no holding ball. State after a certain period of time).

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address “F090H” is a flag indicating whether or not the current jackpot state (special game state) is on. If the flag is on (that is, the stored data is “01H”). ) Indicates that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it is off (ie, if the stored data is “00H”), a state other than the special symbol big hit (ie, the special symbol). State such as a fluctuation state or a demo state). The storage areas allocated to the subsequent addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting data read from the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202.

  First, the probability variation state counter assigned to the address “F091H” is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state counter is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot, and is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol is drawn (see S214 and S216 in FIG. 30). If the value of the probability variation state counter is 0 or more (that is, 1 to 100), it indicates that the special symbol is being varied, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state.

  Further, the time-short state flag assigned to the address “F092H” indicates whether or not the time of the normal symbol is short, and a setting value for designating a table for selecting a variation pattern mode at the time of detachment Is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the short time state 1, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the short time state 2. As described above, the short time states 1 and 3 of the normal symbol are different in that the tables used for selecting the variation pattern at the time of detachment after the number of times of switching of the variation pattern selection table elapses are different from each other. . As described above, all the tables are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  The time-short state counter assigned to the address “F093H” is a counter indicating how many times the number of time-shortage of the normal symbol remains. At this time, the short state counter is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol is drawn (see S214 in FIG. 30). At this time, if the value of the short state counter is 0 or more (i.e., 1 to 100), it indicates that the normal symbol is in the short state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  The variation selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” has a table for selecting a variation pattern effect at the time of losing from the hit-only selection table 202d6, the selection table 202d4 for the time reduction state 1, or the time reduction state 2 It is a counter which shows the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until switching to the selection table 202d5. If this counter is 1 or more, the hit-dedicated selection table 202d6 is selected as a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is selected from the table (the selection table for short time state 1 202d4 or the selection table for short time state 2 202d5) corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the short time state flag. .

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the setting value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f based on the stored offset value. , The addresses “F091H” to “F094H” of the RAM 203 are set. This offset value is read out from the game result table 202e and stored in the offset value storage area when it is determined that the bonus is determined in the special symbol lottery. Further, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 43) executed after the setting value is read from the state setting table 202f and the setting is completed, the initial value is overwritten to “00H”.

  The large opening setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a setting value indicating an opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that is a big hit is stored. Referenced when jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpot types are jackpots of 8 rounds, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is common, so a common set value is set.

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address “F097H” is an area for setting stop symbol information of a special symbol based on a special symbol lottery result. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating a stop symbol corresponding to the outage is set. If the lottery result is win, the stop symbol code corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. At the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is fixedly displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses “F09FH” to “F0FFH” are unused areas, and data stored in these areas is fixed to “00H”. Note that various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage areas 203e. Although explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the normal symbol in the variation variation of the normal symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various setting values, counters, timers, and the like in the various setting value storage areas 203e whose upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. Ring buffer for storing commands (for example, variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) to be output to the sound lamp control device 113, special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, normal symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, stack area Are stored in an address other than “F0H” (for example, an address whose upper byte is “F1H”).

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is used for temporarily storing address data and setting value data when performing reading of data from the ROM 202 and RAM 203 and writing of setting values to the RAM 203, and performing arithmetic processing on the stored setting values. It is. As shown in FIG. 11, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of performing arithmetic processing on stored data, and general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 capable of storing address data and set value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various set value storage area 203e as a fixed value. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data, similar to the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to hold 1-byte data. In addition, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used in pairs. In other words, a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in each pair of registers. The data for 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, address data in the ROM 202, address data in the RAM 203, and the like.

  The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and turned on if the operation result is zero, or data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is provided a load flag or the like that is OFF if the data is other than “00H”, and ON if it is “00H”.

  Hereinafter, control when data is read and written will be described. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various instructions for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and reading and writing of data is performed using one instruction among various instructions. To be executed. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that designates a read source and a setting destination and transfers data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or any one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when data specified in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 is read and the read data is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, for example, data transfer needs to be performed via the general-purpose register 210b1. Specifically, first, the address “1ADAH” is set as the read source, the general register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data defined in the address “1ADAH” is stored in the general register 210b1 using the transfer instruction. Next, using the general register 210b1 as a read source and the address “F093H” as a setting destination, a transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general register 210b1 as the address “F093H”. By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, a variation pattern table 222a defining a plurality of variation pattern effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, and a normal symbol during the jackpot Stored is a pseudo variation selection table 222b that prescribes a variation pattern effect (pseudo variation effect) to be executed in order to notify the short time period step by step in one or a plurality of variation pattern units (block units). When a variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, a corresponding variation pattern mode is selected from variation pattern table 222a. Further, when the variation pattern effect is set during the jackpot, the variation pattern mode is selected from the pseudo variation selection table 222b. The jackpot state changes in duration depending on the player's gaming method, nail adjustment conditions, etc., but in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, based on this pseudo-variation selection table 222b. By setting the mode of the variation pattern effect (pseudo variation effect), it is possible to reliably complete 15 variation pattern effects during the jackpot state regardless of the duration of the jackpot state. Details of the pseudo-variation selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo variation selection table 222b for selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect (pseudo variation effect) executed during the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 12A, the pseudo variation selection table 222b is a block 1 table 222b1 that defines the first to fourth (block 1) modes among the 15 variation pattern effects executed during the jackpot. And the block 2 table 222b2 that defines the fifth to eighth (block 2) modes, the block 3 table A 222b3 that defines the ninth to twelfth (block 3) modes, and the block 3 table B 222b4 The table 4 block A222b5, the block 4 table A222b6, the block 4 table A222b7, the block 4 table A222b8 defining the 13th and 14th (block 4) modes, and the 15th (block 5) mode A defined final variation selection table 222b9 is defined.

  In addition to these, a notification effect selection table 222b10 for selecting a notification effect mode for notifying the player of the total value of the number of additions notified by the variation pattern effect is defined. Each table other than the notification effect selection table 222b10 collectively defines the variation pattern effect modes (variation period of change pattern effect, stop pattern, notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the number of times of each block. For example, since the block 1 table 222b1 defines a plurality of combinations of the first to fourth variation pattern effects, the first to fourth simply by selecting one combination from the block 1 table 222b1. It is possible to set a variation pattern effect mode for four times up to the first time. Therefore, by setting the variation pattern effect in units of blocks, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the case of selecting and setting the variation pattern effect modes corresponding to the number of times assigned to the block.

  There are five types of fluctuation pattern effects to be executed in each block: 2000 ms, 2500 ms, 3500 ms, 4500 ms, and 7500 ms. Basically, the fluctuation pattern effects to be executed in the second half (from the 8th time) The longer fluctuation period is more easily selected. Further, in the variation pattern effect, when the same symbol is prepared, a variation pattern effect having a long variation period is easily selected. That is, the variation pattern effect executed in the second half (after the eighth time) is configured such that the degree of expectation that the same symbols are aligned is higher. As a result, even if the number of times the same symbol is arranged in the variation pattern production executed in the first half is reduced, the player can have a sense of expectation in the variation pattern production executed in the second half, so it is expected to be longer. A feeling can be maintained.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that all the variation pattern effects from the first to the 15th time are completed during the jackpot state by using the pseudo variation selection table 222b. The end condition for each round is 30 seconds from the start of the round, or 10 balls are awarded at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Since the ball is configured so that a maximum of 100 shots can be launched per minute, the shortest time for completing the round is when all the 10 shot balls have won. Since it takes a minimum of 1 minute (= 60 seconds) to launch 100 balls, it takes a minimum of 6 seconds to launch 10 balls. Therefore, the shortest time for completing each round is 6 seconds. Further, an interval period of 1 second is provided between the end of each round and the start of the next round. Therefore, the shortest period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the eighth round can be calculated as 55 seconds (6 seconds × 8 rounds + 1 second × 7 rounds). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by providing a combination of fluctuation periods that can end fluctuations in a range not exceeding 55 seconds (55000 ms), fifteen fluctuation pattern effects are reliably completed during the jackpot. It is configured to be able to. Specifically, by setting a limit to the number of times that the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms and the variation period of 7500 ms is selected, the total variation period of the fifteen variation pattern effects does not become too long. I am doing so.

  The method for selecting the fluctuation period will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 12B and FIGS. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 13 will be explained first, and then FIG. 12B, FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 will be explained.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing combinations of variation periods that can be selected in each table of the pseudo variation selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 13, the block 1 table 222b1 defines a variation pattern effect of 2000 ms for four times. That is, in the big hit state, the variation periods of the first to fourth variation pattern effects are all 2000 ms. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first to fourth (block 1) variation pattern modes are selected from the block 1 table 222b1 based on the end of the game description executed after the start of the jackpot. It is configured. Here, the game explanation is an explanation of what kind of privilege is provided when the symbols are arranged by the variation pattern effect executed during the jackpot, and how many times a chance to obtain the privilege is given (that is, the variation pattern) This is a period for explaining how many times the production is executed) and continues for 3 seconds.

  The combination of the variation pattern effects set in the block 2 table 222b2 is one in which the 2000 ms variation period is set four times, the 2000 ms variation period is three times, and the 4,500 ms variation period is set once. And are prepared. The mode of the variation pattern effect of block 2 is selected from the block 2 table 222b2 based on the end of block 1 (that is, the end of the fourth variation pattern effect). In addition, it is determined at random about which combination of fluctuation periods is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the combination of the variation pattern effects set in the block 3 table A 222b3 is such that the variation period of 3500 ms is set four times, the variation period of 3500 ms is three times, and the variation period of 4500 ms is one. 1 time, 3500 ms fluctuation period 2 times, 4500 ms fluctuation period 2 times, 3500 ms fluctuation period 1 time, 4500 ms fluctuation period 2 times, 7500 ms fluctuation time 1 Are set once. This block 3 table A222b3 is a table used when the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is not selected in block 2 (that is, when all four variations are the variation period of 2000 ms). This is used to collectively set the variation pattern effects of block 3 based on the end of the last variation pattern effect of block 2 (that is, the eighth variation pattern effect).

  On the other hand, as the combination of the variation pattern effects set in the block 3 table B222b4, the variation period of 3500 ms is set four times, the variation period of 3500 ms is set three times, and the variation period of 4500 ms is set once. And a variable period of 3500 ms are set twice, a variable period of 4500 ms is set once, and a variable period of 7500 ms is set once. That is, the number of selections in the 4500 ms fluctuation period is limited to one or less. This block 3 table B222b4 is a table used to select the mode of the block 3 when the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is performed once in the block 2, and the last variation pattern of the block 2 This is used to collectively set the variation pattern effects of block 3 based on the end of the effect (that is, the eighth variation pattern effect). Even if the big hit state ends in the shortest time (ie, 55 seconds) by limiting the number of fluctuation pattern effects in a relatively long period of 4500 ms to two or less in 15 fluctuation pattern effects, 15 times All the fluctuation pattern effects can be executed.

  As described above, there are four types of tables for selecting the variation pattern effect mode of the block 4, the block 4 table A222b5, the block 4 table B222b6, the block 4 table C222b7, and the block 4 table D222b8. Each table is used to select the 13th and 14th variation pattern effects. Further, based on the end of block 3 (that is, the end of the twelfth variation pattern effect), one of these tables is referred to, and the mode of block 4 is set. These tables are selectively used in the 1st to 3rd blocks according to the number of times the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms and the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 7500 ms are selected.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation periods of 4500 ms and 7500 ms have never been selected in the blocks 1 to 3, the fluctuation pattern effect is set using the block 4 table A222b5. The combination of variable periods that can be selected when this block 4 table A222b5 is used includes a variable period of 3500 ms set twice, a variable period of 3500 ms set once, and a variable period of 4500 ms set once. And the one in which the fluctuation period of 4500 ms is set twice.

  In the blocks 1 to 3, when the variation of 4500 ms is selected once and the variation of 7500 ms is not selected once, the variation pattern effect is set using the block B table B222b6. The combination of variable periods that can be selected when this block 4 table B222b6 is used is a variable period of 3500 ms set twice, a variable period of 3500 ms set once, and a variable period of 4500 ms set once. And a variation period of 4500 ms is set once and a variation period of 7500 ms is set once.

  Also, in block 1 to 3, when the variation of 4500 ms is selected twice and the variation of 7500 ms is not selected once, the variation pattern effect is set using the block 4 table C222b7. The combination of variable periods that can be selected when this block 4 table C222b7 is used includes a variable period of 3500 ms set twice, a variable period of 3500 ms set once, and a variable period of 7500 ms set once. Are provided.

  Further, in the blocks 1 to 3, when the variation of 4500 ms is selected twice and the variation of 7500 ms is selected once, the variation pattern effect is set using the block 4 table D222b8. The combination of variable periods that can be selected when this block 4 table D222b8 is used is only one in which the variable period of 3500 ms is set twice.

  Thus, by changing the variation period that can be selected in block 4 according to the variation period selected between blocks 1 to 3, a variation pattern effect of 4500 ms, which is a variation pattern of a relatively long variation period. In addition, the number of times that the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 7500 ms is selected is limited, and the total period of the first to fourteenth variation pattern effects is suppressed from becoming longer.

  Thereby, it can suppress that many fluctuation pattern effects of a long fluctuation period are set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the big hit state before the 15th variation pattern effect is ended due to the prolonged variation pattern effect.

  In the pseudo fluctuation selection table 222b of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the longer fluctuation period is more easily selected in the block 3 and the block 4 than in the block 1 and the block 2 (that is, the block 3 and block 4 are configured to have a higher expectation that the same symbols are arranged in the variation pattern effect), but is not limited to this. If the number of selections of the variation pattern effects in the variation period of 4500 ms is within two times and the number of selections of the variation pattern effects of 7500 ms is within one time in one big hit state, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in block 1, a 4500 ms variation pattern effect and a 7500 ms variation pattern effect with high expectation that the same design is aligned are easily selected, and in block 3, only a 2000 ms variation pattern effect is selected. May be.

  Further, for example, the order of a block in which a variation pattern effect having a long variation period is easily selected and a block in which a variation pattern effect having a short variation period is easily selected may be rearranged based on a specific condition. Specific conditions include, for example, a jackpot type, a player's operation, or a lottery result performed before the block 1 mode is set. Moreover, as an example in the case of rearranging a block, when setting the variation pattern effect aspect of the block 1, for example, it comprises so that an aspect may be selected from the block 3 table A222b3. When setting the variation pattern effect of block 2, for example, the block 4 table A222b5, the block 4 table B222b6, according to the number of times the change pattern effect of 4500 ms or 7500 ms is selected in the block 1, One of the tables is selected from the block 4 table C222b7 and the block 4 table D222b8, and the variation pattern effect mode of the block 2 is set. Furthermore, when setting the aspect of the variation pattern effect of the block 3, for example, when setting the aspect of the variation pattern effect using the table 1 for the block 1 and setting the aspect of the variation pattern effect of the block 4 For example, the variation pattern effect may be set from the block 2 table 222b2.

  As described above, the block 1 to the block 4 are configured so that the execution of all the fluctuating pattern effects can be completed 15 times even when the jackpot ends in the shortest time (that is, the digestion time of each round is 6 seconds). Yes. Therefore, even if the order of the blocks is rearranged, fifteen fluctuation pattern effects can be reliably executed, so that it is possible to suppress the end of the big hit state in the middle of the fluctuation pattern effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  A specific condition for determining whether or not to rearrange blocks will be described more specifically. When the blocks are rearranged based on the jackpot type, for example, the block order is not rearranged for jackpot A to jackpot C (that is, the pseudo-variation selection table 222b of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A)). The variation pattern effect is set as defined in (1)), and the block order may be rearranged for jackpot D to jackpot F.

  Further, when the blocks are rearranged in accordance with the player's operation, for example, the game performance of the jackpot game is variable by pressing the frame button 22 between the start of the jackpot and the execution of the first variation pattern effect. This is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the blocks are rearranged. When the frame button 22 is not pressed, the blocks are not rearranged, and are defined in the pseudo-variation selection table 222b (see FIG. 12A). What is necessary is just to comprise so that the setting of a fluctuation pattern effect may be performed as it is.

  Furthermore, when it is determined whether or not the blocks are rearranged based on the lottery result, for example, a random lottery is performed at the start of the jackpot and it is determined whether or not the blocks are rearranged according to the lottery result. Alternatively, a lottery may be performed at a timing for determining whether or not the jackpot is won, or a lottery may be performed before the mode of block 1 is set after the jackpot is started.

  In this way, by making it possible to rearrange the blocks, it is possible to change the timing at which a fluctuating effect with a high degree of expectation is performed (that is, the timing at which blocks 3 and 4 are set), so the first half of the jackpot Various patterns of expectation can be provided, such as a pattern for concentrating highly fluctuating variation pattern effects and a pattern in which the expectation increases toward the end of the jackpot. By concentrating highly anticipated fluctuation pattern production in the first half of the jackpot, it is possible to roughly grasp the short time period of the normal symbol given after the big jackpot at an early stage, so if many times are reported, the remaining jackpot You can play games with a sense of security and satisfaction. On the other hand, when the expectation increases toward the final stage of the jackpot, the expectation can be maintained until the last variation pattern production. Thus, since different game characteristics can be provided in the jackpot game, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

  Next, the final variation selection table 222b9 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the variation period of the variation pattern effect defined in the final variation selection table 222b9. As shown in FIG. 12B, the final variation selection table 222b9 defines a variation pattern effect of 2000 ms, a variation pattern effect of 2500 ms, and a variation pattern effect of 7500 ms. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when setting the fifteenth variation pattern effect, it is determined which variation period to select based on the progress status (number of rounds) of the jackpot game. It is configured to do. As a result, when the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot is small, a variation pattern effect of a short variation period is selected (a variation pattern of 2000 ms or 2500 ms), and when the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot remains two or more rounds , A variation pattern effect of 7500 ms can be selected. Therefore, even if the remaining period of the jackpot state is short, the fluctuating pattern effects of 15 times can be surely ended during the jackpot state.

  Next, a method for selecting the variation period from the final variation selection table 222b9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are diagrams showing the fluctuating period of the fifteenth (fifth block) variation pattern effect at each timing for setting the fifteenth (fifth block) variation pattern effect. As shown in FIG. 14A, when the timing of setting the fifteenth variation pattern effect is the sixth round based on the end of the first to fourteenth variation pattern effects, the fifteenth variation A variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is executed as the pattern effect. In this way, if there are two or more round-winning games remaining, by selecting a relatively long variation period, the period after the variation effect ends will be long, and the player will be bored. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, after the fifteenth variation pattern effect is completed and the total number of short-term times is notified by the notification effect, a push button effect that is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of additional time and short-term addition is provided. Done. Although details will be described later, when the variation pattern effect during the jackpot is ended early, it is possible to suppress the bore of the player by executing the push button effect.

  FIG. 14B shows a case in which the fifteenth variation pattern effect is set in the middle of the seventh round. In this case, 2500 ms is selected as the fluctuating period of the fifteenth fluctuation pattern effect, and then the notification effect is performed.

  Further, FIG. 15 shows a case where the timing for setting the fifteenth variation pattern effect mode comes after entering the eighth round. In this case, 2000 ms is selected as the fluctuation period of the fifteenth fluctuation pattern effect, and then the notification effect is performed. The total of the first to 14th fluctuation periods is 44500 ms (2000 ms × 7 times, 3500 ms × 4 times, 4500 ms × 2 times, 7500 ms × 1 time) at maximum. Therefore, even if 3 seconds (3000 ms) of the game description is taken into account, the fifteenth variation pattern effect (2000 ms) ends 49500 ms after the start of the jackpot, and is the shortest period until the end of the eight rounds of jackpot There is a margin of 5 seconds or more for 55 seconds (55000 ms). Therefore, even if the jackpot proceeds in the shortest digestion time, the notification effect of 5 seconds or more can be executed, and thus it is possible to suppress the player from overlooking the result of the variation pattern effect.

  Returning to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a pseudo variation flag 223e, and a hit start flag 223f are stored. A game explanation flag 223g, a block counter 223h, a round start flag 223i, a push button flag 223j, a middle flag 223k, and a long flag 223l are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 47). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 47), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1902 in FIG. 47). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 47), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 48). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The pseudo variation flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is an execution period of a variation pattern effect performed during a big hit in order to notify a short time period of a normal symbol. The pseudo variation flag 223e is turned on when a big hit is started, and is turned off after a notification effect to be performed after a total of 15 variation pattern effects is set.

  The hit start flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not it is a big hit start timing. The winning start flag 223f is turned on at the jackpot start timing (that is, the timing at which the opening command is received) (see S1813 in FIG. 47), and is turned off at the timing for setting display of the game description to be displayed after the jackpot start ( (See S2003 in FIG. 49).

  The game explanation flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for displaying the above-described game explanation. The game description flag 223g is turned on at the timing of setting the game description (see S2003 in FIG. 49), and is turned off when 3 seconds, which is the display period of the game description, has passed (see S2008 in FIG. 49). .

  The block counter 223h is a counter to which the value is referred when setting a winning variation pattern effect or a notification effect. This block counter 223h is incremented by 1 when the variation pattern effects of each block are set collectively or when the fifteenth variation pattern effects are completed and the notification effects are set (see FIG. 49 S2009, S2013, and S2105, S2111 and S2120 in FIG. 50). At the start of the jackpot, the value is reset to 1 (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

  If the value of the block counter 223h is 1, it indicates that the next block to set the variation pattern effect mode is the block 1, and if the value is 2, the variation pattern effect mode is set next. If the block is block 2 and the value is 3, then the block for setting the variation pattern effect is the block 3, and if the value is 4, the variation pattern effect is next. The block for which the mode is set indicates that it is block 4, and if the value is 5, it indicates that the block for which the mode of the variation pattern effect is set next is block 5. Further, if the value of the block counter 223h is 6, it indicates that the next setting is the notification effect, and if the value is 7, it indicates that the setting of the notification effect has been completed.

  The round start flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not it is the start timing of each jackpot round. If the round start flag 223i is on, it indicates that the start timing of any one of the jackpot rounds.

  The push button flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not to execute a push button effect in the big hit. This push button flag 223j is turned on when the notification effect setting period has passed before the seventh round (see S2017 in FIG. 49), and turned off when setting the execution of the push button effect. (See S2304 in FIG. 52).

  The middle counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of times that a variation pattern effect of 4500 ms is selected in one big hit. The middle counter 223k is added in accordance with the number of times that the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms is selected when setting the variation pattern effect mode of the block 2 and the block 3 (see S2104 and S2110 in FIG. 50). Initialized to 0 at the beginning of the jackpot.

  The long counter 223l is a counter that counts the number of times that a variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is selected in one big hit. This long counter 223l is added when a variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is selected when setting the variation pattern effect mode of block 3 (see S2110 in FIG. 50), and is initialized to 0 at the start of the jackpot. .

  The middle counter 223k and the long counter 223l count the number of selections of the variation pattern effect of 4500ms and the variation pattern effect of 7500ms, and control so that these variation pattern effects become the number of selections equal to or less than the specified number of times. Yes. That is, between the first to the 14th variation pattern effects, the variation pattern effects are selected such that the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms is 2 times or less and the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is 1 time or less. Regardless of how short the jackpot digestion period is, by setting a limit on the number of times these relatively long variation period variation pattern effects are selected, all 15 variation pattern effects can be performed during the jackpot state. It can be executed reliably.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 53) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 28) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 53).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 17 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. The “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.12 and FIG.13, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 18B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 19 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 19A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 19A and 19B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b). The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 19A to 19B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  Note that on the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to demonstration effects and effects during the big hit state are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is one of the big hits If there is, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, and the demo effect is started even if a predetermined time elapses after the one fluctuating effect is stopped as described above. This is an effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to winning is not started, and the 3rd symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered "0" to "9" is stopped. Only the back image changes as it is displayed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The effect during the jackpot state is the fluctuating pattern effect of 15 times performed during the jackpot, the notification effect informing the total number of short times of the normal symbols notified by the variation pattern effect, and the press performed after the notification effect is ended. Refers to button production. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to notify the player in a stepwise manner of a short time period of a normal symbol that is given after the jackpot is ended, by an effect during the jackpot state that is performed for each jackpot.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 20 to 25, the effect during the jackpot state will be described. 20 and 21 are diagrams showing the variation pattern effect among the effects during the big hit state. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the symbols are variably displayed in the area about 2/3 below the third symbol display device 81. In addition, square regions for displaying characters are formed on the upper left side, upper center, and upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, respectively.

  In the upper left region of the third symbol display device 81 (the region where “ROUND1” is displayed), character information indicating how many rounds the current jackpot is is displayed. The number of rounds displayed in this area is configured to switch to a display corresponding to the round every time the jackpot round progresses. In the upper center area of the third symbol display device 81 (the area indicated as “total 0 times”), the cumulative value of the normal symbols notified by each variation pattern effect is displayed for a short period of time. The numerical value is updated each time a short time period is added. In the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81 (the area displayed as “14 extra chances left”), the remaining number of executions of the variation pattern effect executed during the jackpot is displayed. As the number of executions displayed in this area, “15 times” is displayed at the start of the jackpot, and each time a variation pattern effect is newly executed, it is displayed so as to be subtracted one by one.

  As described above, in the variation pattern effect executed during the jackpot, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the area about 2/3 below the third symbol display device 81. The symbol is composed of three columns: a left symbol row, a central symbol row, and a right symbol row. When the change is stopped, the left and right symbol sequences are first stopped and displayed (see FIG. 20A), and then the central symbol sequence is stopped and displayed. As described above, the variation pattern effect mode is set by selecting a plurality of variations collectively from the pseudo variation selection table 222b.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20 (b), when the same symbols are not prepared when the symbols are stopped, it means that the result of the variation pattern production is out of order, and the number of times of normal symbols is not added. . That is, the cumulative value of the number of time reductions of the normal symbol displayed in the upper center area of the third symbol display device does not change.

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern effect, when all the stopped symbols are the same symbol (see FIG. 20 (b)), as shown in FIG. 20 (c), “+10 times” is displayed, Ordinary symbols will be added 10 times faster. That is, 10 is added to the cumulative value of the number of time reductions of the normal symbol displayed in the upper central area of the third symbol display device. As described above, basically, the number of times added by one variation pattern effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the same symbol is prepared in the fifteenth variation pattern production, the difference between the number of times of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type and the number of additions notified in the first to fourteenth variation pattern production is added. It is notified as the number of times. For example, in the case of winning a jackpot F (100 wins in a short time) and when the cumulative number of additions reported in the first to fourteenth variation pattern effects is 50, in the fifteenth variation pattern effect 50 times are notified, and the cumulative value of the number of short times of normal symbols is set to 100 times.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern effect is repeated 15 times. Then, when the fifteen variation pattern effects are finished, a notification effect as shown in FIG. 22A or FIG. 23A is executed. The notification effect is configured to be highlighted in the lower 2/3 area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily recognize the cumulative value of the number of times of normal symbols. In addition, if the timing of performing the notification effect is a round other than the final round (8 rounds) (for example, 7 rounds), the boy finds the door after the notification effect ends and before the start of the next round. An effect is performed (see FIG. 22B). Although details will be described later, a push button effect is executed in the next round using this door. By displaying the effect of finding the door, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is still a chance to add the normal symbol for a short time.

  On the other hand, if the timing of notifying the player of the total number of short times of normal symbols by the notification effect is the final round (8 rounds) (FIG. 23A), then the third symbol display device 81 In addition, by displaying “additional chance END”, the player is notified that the additional opportunity has ended.

  Next, details of the push button effect will be described. As described above, the push button effect is an effect that is executed in the next round when the normal symbol is notified for a short time before the final round. This push button effect is an effect that, when the door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is opened, the number of times of normal symbols is increased.

  In the push button effect, first, the door discovered by the boy at the end of the notification effect is displayed until the start of the next round (see FIG. 24A). Then, when the next round is started, the characters “Open the door with repeated hits!” Are displayed in the upper right area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 24B). Also, in the area provided on the right side of the door image, a button, a hand pressing the button, and a character “continuous hit!” Are displayed. This display can prompt the player to continuously press the frame button 22.

  In this effect, when the number of short times of normal symbols is added, the door opens, and an indication of the number of additions (for example, 50 times) appears from the opened door (see FIG. 25A). In addition, in accordance with this, the number of times of appearance added from the door is added to the total number of times displayed in the upper center area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. Furthermore, in the area provided on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, the characters “Great success” are displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of times of normal symbols has increased.

  On the other hand, when the push button effect does not notify the addition, the door remains closed, and a crying boy appears on both sides of the door. Is displayed with the word “sorry ...” (see FIG. 25B). Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily with respect to a player that the addition was not performed by pushbutton production.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute the push button effect when the effect set in a state where one or more jackpot rounds remain is completed. Thereby, it can suppress that a player will feel bored in jackpot game. In addition, by prompting the player to press the frame button 22, the player can be actively involved in the game. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set. Similarly, a pseudo-variation data table that is a display data table for effects during the big hit state is prepared in a number corresponding to the set variation effect patterns.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 26). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 28) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 27 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 27).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 27, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 28) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 27, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 53). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 63B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2701 in FIG. 55B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 55 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 55 (b) S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 59) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 63A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 55 (b) ) (See S2703)), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 28), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 28, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 55 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 60). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 64). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 64). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 65).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 55B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 65).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 29 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is performed for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a big hit time setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 32 or a loss time setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot start corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-short state counter is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the time-short state counter is 1 or more. If there is (S213: Yes), 1 is subtracted from each of the value of the time reduction state counter and the probability variation state counter (S214), and this processing is terminated. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of time reductions of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot is 10 to 100, whereas the probability variation period of the special symbol continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. To do. In other words, during the short time period of the normal symbol, the probability of the special symbol is always changed. Therefore, if the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the probability variation state counter is also 1 or more.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S213: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the probability variation state counter is 1 or more (S215). In the process of S215, when it is determined that the probability variation state counter is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the probability variation state counter is decremented by 1, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation state counter is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery (decision of success or failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol losing” is performed, and fluctuations performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a production effect pattern (variation production pattern).

  In the jackpot determination process, first, the first hit random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. It sets as a table for doing (S301). Thereafter, the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag is a state indicating a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), the first per random number table 202a1 for high probability is used from the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. (Not shown) is newly set as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit, instead of the first per-random number table 202a2 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305 To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) as a result of the processing in S303 (S303: No), the processing in S304 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S305. To do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the S
301 or the table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol set in the process of S304 is a big hit (S306).

  As described above, in the first per-random number table 202a1 (not shown) for high probability, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78” are given as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set. In the first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol big hits. In the process of S306, the random number values defined in the table set as the comparison source table among these tables are compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 one by one.

  Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of the random values defined in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random values If there is a big hit (that is, a special symbol jackpot), a big hit time setting process for setting a variation pattern mode or a jackpot control during the jackpot is executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. To do. On the other hand, if there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, when the special symbol is off), the off-time setting process for setting the variation pattern mode etc. at the time of off is executed (S309), The process proceeds to S310. Details of the big hit time setting process (S308) and the loss time setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even if the jackpot is reached, it is possible to clear the random number (counter value) that will be the jackpot before the jackpot state is started. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the big hit is determined is suppressed. Can do. In the present embodiment, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player wins the jackpot state. Clear it before it is recognized. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during a fluctuating effect or before the symbol is stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table for the low probability is set once in the process of S301 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. This is for setting a table for comparison. That is, when any of the first random number tables (the first random number table 202a1 for high probability or the first random number table 202a2 for low probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like Even if there is a problem that the process of S303 or S304, which is an intermediate process, is skipped, the jackpot based on the first hit random number table 202a2 for the low probability set at the beginning of the jackpot determination process. It is possible to determine whether it is true or not.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern mode and the jackpot control during the jackpot.

  In this process, first, the jackpot flag of various setting value storage areas 203e is set to ON (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot jackpot that has been won this time is determined. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80”, the counter value is within the range of “70” to “129”, so that the current big hit type is specified as the big hit C. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “145”, the counter value is within the range of “140” to “169”, so that the current big hit type is specified as the big hit E.

  Next, the setting value corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 7B) and read to the storage areas corresponding to the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. A value is set (S403), and the process proceeds to S404. Here, as setting values that are read from the game result setting table 202e and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern (number of display symbols) of the LED 37a, information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), Information for specifying a table for selecting the variation pattern mode (table selection information) from the variation pattern selection table 202d, and a control pattern (large opening pattern) for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a Etc.

  As described above, when setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the setting destination address are stored in any of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored transfer source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which no address data is stored, and then the setting destination address The set value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data. In the process of S403, the transfer control through the register 210 is repeated for the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random value (counter value), and various setting values are determined based on the specified jackpot type in the process of S403, but the range of the random value (counter value) And various setting values may be defined in direct association with each other. In other words, a table defining the range of random number values (counter values) and various corresponding set values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the set values may be directly specified from the random number values with reference to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and is compared with a table specified based on the table selection information, thereby selecting a fluctuation pattern mode (S404). Then, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S405). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  After setting the variation pattern, at the end of the jackpot, a game result setting acquisition process, which is a process for acquiring and setting offset information, which is information for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, is executed (S406), This process ends.

  Subsequently, the game result setting acquisition process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result setting acquisition process (S406) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding an offset value based on a special symbol lottery result in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting acquisition process (S406), first, an offset value based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7B) (S501). For example, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot C, “02H” is read as the offset value. Then, the read offset value is stored in the offset value storage area 203e (S504), and this process ends.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e in the process of S504 is held until the jackpot end timing and is a jackpot end process (FIG. 42) for setting the state after the jackpot end. (Refer to FIG. 8A) for determining data to be read from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A). As described above, the random value (counter value) acquired along with the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start prize) is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area. Since it is configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot based on the value, it is possible to limit the period during which the random value itself that is the jackpot of the special symbol is held for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol from the outside.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the offset setting process (S309) executed when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol in the jackpot determination process (S208) will be described.

  In the loss setting process, first, a table to be used for determining the variation pattern is specified (S501). Specifically, it is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 7A) with reference to the state of the short time state flag in the various setting value storage areas 203e and the counter value of the variation selection state counter. Any one of the plurality of tables (the selection table 202d4 for the short time state, the selection table 202d5 for the short time state 2, and the selection table 202d6 for the after game) is specified. As described above, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is not 0, the big hit after selection table 202d6 is selected. On the other hand, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is 0, a table corresponding to the state of the time reduction state flag is selected.

  After the processing of S501 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S502). Based on the read value of the variation type counter CS1 and the table selected in the processing of S501, the variation pattern A mode is selected (S503). Then, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S504), and this process ends. The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 40) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 29), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for executing a hold process for values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S701). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). . And it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S705, the RAM 203 stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the processing of S706, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S707). Here, whether the special symbol is a big hit or not is determined by one of the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (winning value) stored in the first per-random number table 202a. Determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first per random number table 202a1 for the high probability time, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52”. , 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 " There are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and are three numbers “7, 107, 282” stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the low probability. .

  Whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation state flag is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S707, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation state flag. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S706 and the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table is compared, Of the six types of special jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F), which jackpot type is determined. As described above, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S706. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation state flag is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S706 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with a random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) from a variation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. It is selected according to. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variable patterns for jackpots", "Normal normal reach", "Super reach", and "Special reach" are specified. , “Shared Super Reach” and “Shared Special Reach” are stipulated. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S707 predicts whether or not the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S708), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S804). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S805).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time-short state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation state flag is on, it is determined that the time is short for the normal symbol. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S808 that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S809). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, the special symbol is configured to be less likely to hit the normal symbol during the big hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so the electric accessory attached to the first winning slot 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is suppressed that the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the big hit of the special symbol, A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S809, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S807. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 6C).

  If it is determined in the processing of S808 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S808: No), the processing proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S807 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 6C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a normal symbol win (S812). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S812: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S814). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S814: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is now. Is determined (S815). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S815, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. If it is determined in the process of S814 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S812, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S812: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S819). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S819: Yes), the variable symbol display on the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The variation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S819: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S821), the process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S822, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S822 (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S818, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the process of S813 or S818.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S824). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S825), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 40) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S902). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S903: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S905), and this process ends. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1112. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1201 to S1207 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1210 and S1211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) or the start winning process (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1204). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1205). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S816 or the processing of S817 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1206). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S405 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 32) or the process of S604 of the lost time setting process (see FIG. 34), the variation pattern The first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display according to the above. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S405 of the big hit setting process (see FIG. 32) or the process of S604 of the lost time setting process (see FIG. 34). Is ended, the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the process of S404 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 32) or S603 of the lost time setting process (see FIG. 34). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the above process.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36) or the process of S821, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 36), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S813 or the processing of S818 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 36) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1209: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1210, S1211).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1210). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1211).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S1212 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1212), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1213). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1214), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1215), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1208 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1210 and S1211 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, in the process when the power is shut down, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. In the process (S1101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1204). This jackpot control process (S1204) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1301). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) S212 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1301, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1301: Yes), an opening command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1303). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1303, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the special symbol is a big hit (1303: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1304). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1306). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, 10 balls When winning, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1307, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308), and this processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), it is determined whether it is the big hit end timing (S1309).

  In the process of S1309, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1309: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end is set and the setting value for the jackpot is reset. The jackpot end process is executed (S1310), the game state after the jackpot end is set, and the process ends. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 42), the jackpot flag is initialized together with other set values (“00H” is set). Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent only the jackpot flag from being turned off and other set values to remain in the jackpot setting.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is set in the final round of the jackpot after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established. The In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the end timing of the set ending effect (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that the jackpot end timing.

  Note that the jackpot end timing is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of jackpot, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot end process (S1210) as the jackpot end timing. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the jackpot end process (S1310) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 41) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, the jackpot end process (S1310) is a process for setting a setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end and resetting the jackpot setting value.

  In the jackpot end process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202f is read from the ROM 202 (S1401). Here, “read” means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D8H) of the head address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202f are used as any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 33) executed before the current jackpot is started, it was previously stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 10). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by 4 is performed (S1403). The value of 4 is the number of types of data defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A) as the setting value after the big hit. That is, four types of setting values are specified in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8A): the special symbol lottery state, the normal symbol state, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection mode switching frequency.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 8 (a), the state setting table 202f has a special symbol lottery state, a normal symbol state, a short time count, and a variation pattern selection corresponding to the offset value 00H from the smaller address value side. Number of mode switching, special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 01H, normal symbol state, short time, variable pattern selection mode switching number, ... special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 07H, normal symbol state, Data is stored in the order of the number of time reductions and the number of switching times of the change pattern selection mode. That is, every time the address value increases by 4, the setting value corresponding to the offset value that is larger by 1 is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the head address of the state setting table 202f and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the processing of S1403, an address difference (offset) with respect to the head address of the state setting table 202f is obtained.

  When the processing of S1403 ends, the difference between the address value set in the paired general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1401 with respect to the top address of the state setting table 202f calculated in the processing of S1402 (Offset) is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

  Next, the address at which the probability change state flag of the various setting value storage area 203e is stored is set as the setting destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the setting destination address at the transfer source address set in the processing of S1404. Is transferred (S1406).

  After that, it is determined whether or not all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined that it exists (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data defined in the address after the addition is read (S1408), and 1 is set to the set destination address. Addition is performed, and the data read out in S1308 is stored in the address after the addition (S1409). Then, the process returns to S1407, and it is determined again whether or not all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407). That is, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeatedly performed until all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1407 that all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407: Yes), the settings are made in the various setting value storage areas 203e. A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state that has been set is set (S1410), processing for clearing the jackpot set value (S1411, S1412) is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot set value, the address immediately before the head address of the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address. (S1411) A zero setting process is executed in which 0 is set to the address where the setting value for the big hit in the various setting value storage area 203e is set (S1412).

  Subsequently, a zero setting process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. This zero setting process (see FIG. 43) is a process of initializing by overwriting 0 to various setting values set to perform the big hit control in the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 43), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501).

  Next, in the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B), the address data stored at the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read and indicated by the read address data. The address of the RAM 203 is set as a setting destination address (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (reading source) address is “00H” (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is “00H”. If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1503: No), “00H” is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  Thereafter, the processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until “00H” is read from the big jackpot clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B). In the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B), “00H” is stored only in the end address, and “00H” is not stored in the addresses other than the end. The processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until “00H” is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data defined in FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the zero setting process (see FIG. 43), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. When it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed, “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B) without being configured to end the processing. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process is terminated.

  When the number of settings is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of settings each time the number of settings changes due to circumstances such as transferring the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program in accordance with the counted number. Therefore, it takes time to count the set value, and if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify the wrong number of repetitions, so the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. In some cases, the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B). At times, the possibility of designers making mistakes can be reduced. Therefore, since the data setting at the time of jackpot end can be more reliably executed based on the control program, malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 43) is the case where “00H” is read as data in the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 10). The address where “00H” is “00H” (ie, address “F000H”) is an area for storing the setting value related to the launch of the ball, and the address where the setting value does not change before and after the end of the jackpot (initialization is required at the end of the jackpot This is because the address does not. Since it is an address that does not require initialization at the time of jackpot end, it is not necessary to prescribe it as an initialization target address in the jackpot end clear table 202g (see FIG. 8B), and the jackpot end clear table 202g ( There is no possibility of appearing except at the end of FIG. 8 (b). Therefore, it is possible to prevent “00H” from being read out as data before the initialization of all setting values is completed and the processing to be terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1718 (see FIG. 45) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 45), it executes a power-off process in S1718. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1718 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1718 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process of S1718, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current ramp-up process is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1718, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1718 is executed (see S1717 in FIG. 45). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1718 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1608. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1718 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1611, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1609 is that when the process from S1604 to S1606 is reached via the process in S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes in S1702 to S1710. In S1701, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not in S1702 to S1710, which is mainly related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1711, the fluctuation display setting process of S1712, the pseudo fluctuation setting process of S1713, and the push button effect setting process of S1714 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1714 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1708 described later is set (S1703), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1704). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1709, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1709 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display setting process, a pseudo variation setting process for setting an aspect of an interesting effect such as a variation pattern effect performed during the jackpot is executed (S1713), and when the process of S1713 is completed, the process is performed during the jackpot. The push button effect setting process for setting the push button effect is executed (S1714).

  When the processing of S1714 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1715). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1715 (S1715: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1717), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1718). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1719), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1715 (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1716), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1716: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1716: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1707) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. This frame button input monitoring / production process (S1707) is a process of setting the production according to the input status of the player's frame button 22 in the above-described push button production. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1707).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1707), first, it is determined whether or not the SW valid time is 0 (S4301). This SW valid period is a period set as a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 can be accepted at the start of the push button effect, and the processing of S4301 is whether or not the period during which the frame button 22 receives the operation has ended. This is a process for determining. If it is determined in the process of S4301 that the SW valid time is 0 (ie, the frame button 22 is outside the period for accepting an operation) (S4301: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW valid period is not 0 (that is, within the period during which the frame button 22 accepts an operation) (S4301: No), the SW valid period is subtracted (S4302).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed, the SW press count counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 (S4304), and the process proceeds to S4305. The SW pressing number counter is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) is set as the upper limit value of the SW pressing number counter at the start of the push button effect.

  In the process of S4305, it is determined whether or not the value of the SW pressing number counter is an upper limit value (S4305), and when it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (that is, the value of the SW pressing number counter is less than the upper limit value). (S4305: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter is the upper limit value (S4305: Yes), a result notification effect for notifying the result of the push button effect is set (S4306). Here, the result notification effect is an effect (see FIG. 25A) in which the door is opened and the number of times of normal symbols is added (see FIG. 25 (a)), or the door is left closed and the number of times of normal symbols is changed. This indicates that the performance is not performed (see FIG. 25B).

  After setting the result notification effect, by setting the SW valid time to 0, the frame button 22 is set to a state in which the operation is not accepted, and the value of the SW pressing number counter is set to 0 (S4307). This process ends.

  Next, a command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination processing (S1711) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 48) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1808. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1807, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1809). When a winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1810). When the process of S1810 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the process of S1810 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1811) and return to the main process.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1809 (S1809: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of jackpot is received from the main controller 110 (S1812). When the opening command is received (S1812: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223e and the hit start flag 223f are set to ON (S1813), and this process ends. In addition, if the pseudo variation flag 223e is on, it indicates that the variation pattern effect is being executed in order to inform stepwise the number of times of normal symbols. If the hit start flag 223f is on, initial setting at the start of jackpot is executed in a pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 49) described later.

  If it is determined in S1812 that the opening command has not been received (S1812: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1814). When the round number command is received (S1814: Yes), the round start flag 223i is turned on (S1815) to indicate that it is the start timing of a new round (S1815), which is further indicated by the round number command. A display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1816), and this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1819), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1713) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process (S1713). This pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1713) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and executes an effect such as a fluctuation pattern effect executed during the jackpot. It is a process to control.

  In this pseudo variation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation flag 223e is on (S2001). If the pseudo variation flag 223e is off (S2001: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pseudo-variation flag 223e is on (S2001: Yes), it indicates that it is a period in which a big-boom interest effect such as a variation pattern effect is executed, so that whether the hit start flag 223f is on. It is determined whether or not (S2002).

  When it is determined that the winning start flag 223f is on (S2002: Yes), the winning start flag 223f is turned off and the game explanation flag 223g is turned on to indicate the display period of the game explanation (S2003). ). Then, the display of the game description is set (S2004), each counter related to the big hit effect is initialized (S2005), and this process is terminated. Here, each counter related to the jackpot effect is a block counter 223h that indicates which of the jackpot effects is being executed, and how many times the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms is selected in the jackpot variation pattern effect. Middle counter 223k indicating the number of times, and a long counter 223l indicating how many times the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is selected.

  In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the hit start flag 223f is not on (that is, is off) (S2002: No), it is determined whether or not the game explanation flag 223g is on (S2006). If it is determined that the game description flag 223g is ON, it means that the game description is being displayed. Therefore, whether the game description setting period of 3 seconds has elapsed (that is, the display of the game description is displayed). (S2007: No), if it is determined that the set period has not elapsed (that is, less than 3 seconds from the start of display of the game description) (S2007: No) The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set period has elapsed (S2007: Yes), it means that it is time to end the display of the game description, so the display of the game description is ended, the game description flag is turned off, and the block 1 (that is, the first to fourth) variation pattern effects are set (S2008), 1 is added to the block counter 223h (S2009), and the process is terminated. As described above, the variation pattern effect of block 1 is selected and set from the block 1 table 222b1 defined in the pseudo variation selection table 222b (see FIG. 12A). The block 1 table 222b1 defines a combination of a plurality of modes for the first to fourth variation pattern effects, but the variation period of the four variation pattern effects is selected regardless of which combination is selected. Are all set to 2000 ms.

  In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the game explanation flag 223g is not on (that is, is off) (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not the previously set effect period has elapsed (S2010). Here, the effect period refers to the effect period of the notification effect that is executed after the fluctuating pattern effect of the block unit or the fifteen times of the change pattern effect. For example, if block 1 was set last time, and change pattern effects for a change period of 2000 ms were set all at once for 4 times, 8 seconds (2000 ms × 4) have elapsed since block 1 was set It is determined whether or not.

  In the process of S2010, when it is determined that the set production period has not elapsed (S2010: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set production period has elapsed (S2010: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the block counter 223h is 6 (S2011). If the value of the block counter 223h is 6 (S2011: Yes), it means that the next effect to be set is a notification effect, so that the notification effect mode is set to the pseudo-variation selection table 222b (see FIG. 12A). Is selected and set from the notification effect selection table 222b10 (S2012), 1 is added to the block counter 223h (S2013), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2011, when it is determined that the value of the block counter 223h is a value other than 6 (S2011: No), it is subsequently determined whether the value of the block counter 223h is 7 (S2014). If the value of the block counter 223h is 7, it indicates that the set period of the notification effect has elapsed, so it is determined whether or not the present is the eighth round of the jackpot game (S2015). If it is determined that the current round is not the eighth round (that is, one of rounds 1 to 7) (S2015: No), the push button flag 223j is set to execute the push button effect in the next round. The pseudo-variation flag 223e is turned off (S2016), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round is the eighth round (S2015: Yes), the processing of S2017 is skipped, the pseudo variation flag 223e is turned off (S2016), and this processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2014 that the value of the block counter is not 7 (S2014: No), it is the timing for setting the variation pattern effect of any of blocks 2 to 5 (final variation). This means that a block setting process for collectively setting the variation pattern effects to be executed is executed (S2018), and this process ends.

  Next, the block setting process (S2018) will be described with reference to FIG. The block setting process (S2018) is executed in the pseudo-variation process (FIG. 49) of the main process (FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed during the jackpot as described above. This is a process for setting the variation pattern effects collectively (in blocks).

  In this block setting process (S2018), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the block counter 223h is 2 (S2101). As a result of the determination, if the value of the block counter 223h is 2, it means that the next setting is the block 2 (the fifth to the eighth variation pattern effect mode), so the mode of the block 2 is set. (S2102). As described above, the variation pattern effect of the block 2 is selected and set from the block 2 table 222b2 defined in the pseudo variation selection table 222b (see FIG. 12A). The block 2 table 222b2 is set with four variation pattern effects for a 2000ms variation period, three variation pattern effects for a 2000ms variation period, and one variation pattern effect for a 4500ms variation period. What is set is specified.

  Next, in the variation pattern effect of block 2, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is selected (S2103), and when it is determined that the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms is selected (S2103: Yes), 1 is added to the middle counter 223k (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. On the other hand, in the process of S2103, when it is determined that the 4500 ms variation pattern effect is not selected (S2103: No), the process of S2104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2105. Then, 1 is added to the value of the block counter 223h by the process of S2105 (S2105), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the value of the block counter 223h is not 2 (that is, any of 3 to 5) (S2101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the block counter 223h is 3. If it is determined (S2106) and it is determined that the value is 3 (S2106: Yes), it means that it is the setting timing of the variation pattern effect of the block 3 (9th to 12th times). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223k is 1 (S2107).

  In the processing of S2106, when it is determined that the value of the middle counter 223k is not 1 (that is, 0) (S2107: No), the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is not selected once in block 2. Therefore, the block 3 table A222b3 is selected as the table for selecting the variation pattern effect mode of the block 3, and one mode is selected from the modes defined in the block 3 table A222b3. Is set (S2108). On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value of the middle counter 223k is 1 (S2107: Yes), it indicates that the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is selected once in block 2, As a table for selecting the mode of variation pattern effect of block 3, block 3 table B223b4 is selected, one mode is selected from the modes defined in this block 3 table B222b4, and set in a batch ( S2109). By selecting the block 3 mode from the block 3 table B222b4, the number of times that the variation pattern effect of the variation period of 4500 ms is set in the block 3 can be limited to a maximum of one.

  After the mode of block 3 is set by the process of S2108 or the process of S2109, the values of the middle counter 223k and the long counter 223l are updated according to the setting contents (S2110). For example, if the variation pattern effect of 2000 ms variation period is set 3 times and the change pattern effect of 4500 ms is set once as the mode of block 3, 1 is added to the value of the middle counter 223k, and the value of the long counter 223l is Leave 0. After the process of S2110, 1 is added to the block counter 223h (S2111), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value of the block counter 223h is not 3 (that is, 4 or 5) (S2106: No), subsequently, whether the value of the block counter 223h is 4 or not. Is determined (S2112). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the block counter 223h is not 4 (that is, 5), the final variation process, which is a process for setting the fifteenth (block 5) variation pattern effect mode, is performed. This is executed (S2121), and this process is terminated. Details of the final variation process (S2121) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2112 that the value of the block counter 223h is 4 (S2112: Yes), it is time to set the variation pattern effect mode of block 4 (13th and 14th). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the middle counter 223k is 2 (S2113).

  As a result of the processing of S2113, when it is determined that the middle counter 223k is 2 (S2113), it is then determined whether or not the value of the long counter 223l is 1 (S2114). When it is determined that the value of the long counter 223l is 1 (S2114: Yes), the block 4 table D222b8 is selected as a table for selecting the variation pattern effect mode of the block 4, and this block 4 table is selected. One mode is selected from the modes defined in D222b8, set in a batch (S2115), and the process proceeds to S2120. When the variation pattern effect mode of the block 4 is selected from the block 4 table D222b8, 3500 ms is set as the variation period of the fourteenth and fifteenth variation pattern effects. In block 1 to block 3, since the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms and the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms have already been executed once, in block 4, the variation pattern effect of these relatively long variation periods is performed. Is controlled not to be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2114 that the value of the long counter l is 0 (S2114: No), the block 4 table C222b7 is selected as a table for selecting the variation pattern effect mode of the block 4, One of the modes defined in the block 4 table C222b7 is selected and set in a batch (S2116), and the process proceeds to S2120. When selecting the mode from the block 4 table C222b7, the variation pattern effect of 3500 ms is set twice, or the variation pattern effect of 3500 ms and the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms are set once. . When shifting to the processing of S2116, in block 1 to block 3, the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms has been executed twice, but the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms has not been executed once, so the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms is selected. It is configured to be possible.

  If it is determined in step S2113 that the value of the middle counter 223k is not 2 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2113: No), then whether the value of the middle counter 223k is 1 or not. If the result of the determination is 1 (S2117: Yes), one mode is selected from the modes defined in the block 4 table B222b6 and set in a batch (S2118). And the process proceeds to S2120. When the mode is selected from the block 4 table B222b6, the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms and the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms can be selected once each at a maximum.

  In the processing of S2117, if it is determined that the value of the middle counter 223k is not 1 (that is, 0), one mode is selected from the modes defined in the block A table A222b5 and is collectively displayed. The setting is made (S2119), and the process proceeds to S2120. When the mode is selected from the block 4 table A222b6, the variation pattern effect of 4500 ms and the variation pattern effect of 7500 ms can be selected once each at a maximum.

  In the process of S2120 executed after any of the processes of S2115, S2116, S2118, and S2119, 1 is added to the value of the block counter 223h, and this process ends.

  As described above, when selecting the mode of the block 3 or the block 4, the table for selecting the mode is properly used according to the value of the middle counter 223k or the value of the long counter 223l, so that a relatively long fluctuation period. There is a limit to the number of times that a variation pattern effect of 4500 ms or 7500 ms is selected. Therefore, it can be suppressed that many long variation pattern effects are selected and the jackpot ends before the 15th variation pattern effect ends. Further, since the fifteen variation pattern effects are divided into five blocks and the mode is set for each block, the process for selecting the variation pattern effect is also performed in five steps. . Therefore, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced as compared with the case where all the variation pattern effects are set in a lump.

  Next, the final variation process (S2121) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This final variation process (S2121) is a process for setting the fifteenth (block 5) variation pattern effect as described above.

  In this final variation processing (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the eighth round (final round) of the jackpot (S2201), and if it is the eighth round (final round), the fifteenth (five blocks) As the first variation pattern effect, one is selected and set from the variation pattern effects of the 2000 ms variation period defined in the final variation selection table 222b9 (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. The “eighth round” here refers to the end of the seventh round to the start of the eighth round. That is, an interval period of 1 second provided from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 8th round is also included. Similarly, the other rounds indicate the period from the end of the previous round to the end of the round.

  If it is determined by the processing of S2201 that the current round is not the eighth round (that is, the first to seventh rounds) (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the seventh round (S2204). (S2203: Yes), as the fifteenth (fifth block) variation pattern effect, one is selected from the variation pattern effects of the 2500 ms variation period defined in the final variation selection table 222b9. Select and set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2209. In this way, the fluctuating period of the fifteenth (fifth block) fluctuating pattern effect is configured to be variable according to the number of jackpot rounds at the time of setting the fluctuation. That is, since the variation pattern effect of different fluctuation periods can be selected according to the progress status of the jackpot state, when the jackpot period is small, by selecting the variation pattern effect of the short variation period, By the end of the 8th round, the fluctuation pattern effect of 15 times that is the specified number of times can be finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the same number of chances of adding is given for each jackpot, so that a fair feeling can be given to the player.

  If it is determined by the processing of S2203 that it is not the seventh round (that is, the first to sixth rounds) (S2203: No), it is determined whether it is the sixth round (S2205), and the sixth round (S2205: Yes), as the fifteenth (fifth block) variation pattern effect, one is selected from the variation pattern effects in the variation period of 7500 ms defined in the final variation selection table 222b9. Select and set (S2206), and the process proceeds to S2209. By selecting a variation pattern effect of 7500 ms, which is a relatively long variation period, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating pattern effect of 15 times from being finished early and boring the player.

  In the process of S2205, when it is determined that it is not the sixth round (that is, the first to fifth rounds) (S2205: No), the variation pattern of the variation period of 7500 ms defined in the final variation selection table 222b9 From the effect, one mode which is finally removed is selected and set (S2206), the push button flag 223j is turned on (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2209.

  When the fifteenth (fifth block) fluctuating pattern effect is executed in the first to fifth rounds, even if a fluctuating pattern effect with a long fluctuating period is selected, a period of one or more rounds is left. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the push button flag 223j is turned on in order to execute the push button effect when the 15th variation pattern effect setting timing comes in the first to fifth rounds. It is configured. Even if the fifteen variation pattern effects are finished early, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored during the jackpot game by executing the push button effects. When the fifteenth (fifth block) variation pattern effect is set in the first to fifth rounds, the number of times of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the jackpot type. Regardless of whether or not the value is reached, a variation pattern effect that is out of place is set. As a result, if the number of time reductions does not reach the time reduction number corresponding to the jackpot type, the remaining number of time reductions can be notified by the push button effect. It can make you expect.

  In the processing of S2209, which is executed after the processing of any of S2202, S2204, S2206, and S2208 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the block counter 223h (S2209), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the push button effect process (S1714) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the push button effect process (S1714). This push button effect process (S1714) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the push button effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. It is a process for making it.

  In the push button effect setting process (S1714), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 223i is on (S2301). When it is determined that the round start flag 223i is not on (S2301: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the round start flag 223i is on (S2301: Yes), the round start flag 223i is turned off (S2302), and whether or not the push button flag 223j is on. It is determined (S2303).

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that the push button flag 223j is off (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the push button flag 223j is on (S2303: Yes), the push button flag 223j is turned off (S2304), the start of the push button effect is set (S2305), and this process is terminated. To do.

  By setting the start of the push button effect by the push button effect setting process (S1714), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even when the variation pattern effect is finished. Also, by executing the push button effect, the player can actively press the frame button 22 and participate in the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 65, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2502, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 53) (S2505), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2401), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2502 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. , And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2502, the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2403, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 63A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 63A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 55 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 55 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 has been received, that is, when a display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3701), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 28) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2703), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705). The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, big hit E, big hit F, before and after The stop type table corresponding to the outage reach, reach other than front / rear out, and complete off) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2709) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3801: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (3801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3802), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S3803).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3804). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3805), the process returns to S3801.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S3805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3905, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S3902. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3804: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3806). If there is a display variation type command (S3806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3807), and the processing returns to S3801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 57B, details of the stop type command processing (S3807) will be described. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, big hit E, big hit F, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out completely) The stop type table corresponding to any one) is determined (S4001), and the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. In comparison, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S4002).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4002 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S4003), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4002 is described. In the task process (S2704) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S4002 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4003, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3806 that there is no display stop type command (S3806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3808). If there is a display round number command (S3808: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3809), and the process returns to S3801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58A, details of the round number command processing (S3809) will be described. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4102).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the round number command process (S3809) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 56).

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3808 that there is no display round number command (S3808: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display pseudo-variable command among the unprocessed commands (S3810). If there is a display pseudo variation command (S3810: Yes), pseudo variation command processing is executed (S3811), and the processing returns to S3801.

  Here, the details of the pseudo-variable command process (S3811) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the pseudo-variable command process. This pseudo variation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display pseudo variation command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the pseudo-variable command processing, first, a pseudo-variable display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot effect indicated by the display pseudo-variable command is determined, and the determined pseudo-variable display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. The data is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4202).

  Then, based on the pseudo-variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4205), the pseudo variation command process (S3811) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 56).

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3810 that there is no display pseudo-variation command (S3810: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S3812). If there is an image change command (S3812: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S3813), and the process returns to S3801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the rear image change command processing (S3813) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S3813). This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process (S3813), first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S2801). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2802, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3812 that there is no rear image change command (S3812: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3814). If (S3814: Yes), an error command process is executed (S3815), and the process returns to S3801.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3815) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S3814: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3819), and the processing returns to S3801.

  In the process of S3801, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3801: Yes). ), The processing of S3802-S3819 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3801 to S3819 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S3801 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2708) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 57 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 57 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3901. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3902, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2703) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2704), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S3015 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 17B and 17C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer setting process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off (S3301: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident from the character ROM 234. The video RAM 235 is transferred. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 55B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 59) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 60 to 62) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64) (see S3301: No in FIG. 63A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2703) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3511, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 28 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the number of times of the normal symbol given after the big hit is changed step by step by the changing pattern effect or the push button effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit state. It is comprised so that it may alert | report. In addition, the variation pattern effect is performed 15 times during the jackpot, and when the same symbol is prepared in each variation effect, the display value of the short time count of the normal symbol is added. This variation pattern effect mode is set in a lump in a plurality of variation pattern effect units (block units). And when setting the aspect of the variation pattern effect of each block, the aspect of the block set this time is selected according to the setting content of the previous block. Specifically, an upper limit value is set for the number of times of setting a variation pattern effect of 4500 ms or a variation pattern effect of 7500 ms, which is a variation pattern effect having a relatively long variation period, and selection of these variation pattern effects in the previous block is selected. According to the number of times, the number of selections of the variation pattern effects in the relatively long variation period in the block set this time is controlled.

  Here, the duration of the jackpot state is not constant because it changes depending on the timing at which the player launches the ball and the adjustment of the nail. Therefore, if the configuration of the variation pattern effect of each block is set freely without limiting the variation period, the jackpot state will end before the fifteen variation pattern effects that are the prescribed number of times have not been completed. There is a risk that. If the variation pattern effect is finished less than the specified number of times, there is a risk that the player may be dissatisfied or discomforted.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, for the variation pattern effect of a relatively long variation period, since the number of selections is limited, even if the jackpot ends in the shortest period. The specified number of fluctuation pattern effects can be reliably terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or feeling uncomfortable by ending the number of fluctuations less than the specified number.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when setting the fifteenth variation pattern effect (that is, the last variation pattern effect executed during the jackpot), the progress status of the jackpot is determined and the variation pattern effect is determined. It is configured so that the fluctuation period can be set. Thereby, for example, when the aspect of the fifteenth variation pattern effect is set at a relatively early stage, such as a state in which the big hit state remains for two or more rounds, a variation pattern effect having a long variation period can be set. Therefore, it can be suppressed that all the variation pattern effects end early, and the subsequent jackpot game is simply an operation for obtaining a ball. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player for a longer time in the big hit state.

  On the other hand, for example, when the fifteenth variation pattern effect is set at a relatively late stage, such as during an interval period after the end of the seventh round, a variation pattern effect with a short variation period can be set. Thereby, it is possible to reliably end the specified number of times (15 times) of the variation pattern effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or feeling uncomfortable by ending the number of fluctuations less than the specified number.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 15 variation pattern effects are divided into five blocks, and the mode is set for each block, so the process for selecting the variation pattern effect mode Can also be executed in five steps. Therefore, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced as compared with the case where all the variation pattern effects are set in a lump.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the progress status of the jackpot is determined, and it is determined whether or not a push button effect is additionally generated. Thereby, even if 15 fluctuation pattern effects are finished early, the player's interest can be attracted by the push button effects, so that the player can be prevented from being bored.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the one jackpot state, the variation period of the variation pattern effect of each block is set based on the state of the previous block and the progress status of the jackpot game, but it is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the period from the start to the end of the jackpot may be measured, and the change period of the change pattern effect may be set based on the previous jackpot period. Further, the jackpot period may be stored a plurality of times, and the variation period of the variation pattern effect may be set based on the average value thereof. The jackpot period varies depending on how the player launches the ball and the adjustment status of the nails of the pachinko machine 10, etc., so if the same player plays a game with the same pachinko machine 10, the jackpot ends. The periods until are close to each other. Therefore, since the variation pattern effect can be executed in accordance with the jackpot period, the jackpot period is insufficient, the specified number of variation pattern effects cannot be performed, and the player feels uncomfortable. Can be suppressed. Conversely, it is possible to prevent the jackpot period from becoming too long and the fluctuation pattern effect of the specified number of times from being finished at an early stage, thereby boring the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern effect executed during the jackpot is 15 times, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be 5 times or 20 times. Moreover, you may comprise so that the frequency | count of a variation pattern effect may be added with respect to a regular frequency | count according to the progress condition of jackpot. For example, when it is determined that the timing of setting the last fluctuation pattern effect of the specified number of times is two or more rounds before the final round, the change pattern effect may be added twice. In addition, the timing for determining whether or not to add is not limited to the timing for setting the last fluctuation pattern effect, and whether or not to add the number of fluctuations by determining the progress status of the jackpot in each block May be judged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prescribed number of fluctuation pattern effects from being finished at an early stage and bore the player. In addition, by adding the number of variation pattern effects, it is possible to make the player feel that the chance of lottery has increased, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when setting the mode of the block, the progress status of the jackpot is judged, and if it is expected that the specified number of fluctuation pattern effects will end at an early stage, the fluctuation pattern effect with a long fluctuation period is selected. You may comprise so that it may become easy. Also, for example, when it is expected that the specified number of fluctuation pattern effects will end at an early stage, the values of the middle counter 223k and the long counter 223l are reset, and the fluctuation pattern effect of 4500ms or the fluctuation pattern effect of 7500ms. May be selected so as to exceed the upper limit number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prescribed number of fluctuation pattern effects from being finished at an early stage and bore the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, five types of 2000 ms, 2500 ms, 3500 ms, 4500 ms, and 7500 ms are provided as variable periods that can be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the number of variation pattern effects for each block is not limited to the number in the present embodiment. These values can be arbitrarily determined within a range that can be set so that the specified number of times can be ended even if the jackpot ends in the shortest period.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the same symbol is prepared as a result of the variation pattern effect executed during the big hit state, the normal symbol time count is added and displayed. It is not limited. For example, as a jackpot type, a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the jackpot ends and a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol are provided, and the same symbol is displayed by the variation pattern effect. You may comprise so that it may alert | report to transfer to the high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol when it arranges. Further, for example, a jackpot of 8 rounds and a jackpot of 16 rounds are provided. And even if it is any jackpot, it is configured so that the specified number of fluctuation pattern effects will be completed by the end of the 8th round, and if the same pattern is prepared by the fluctuation pattern effects, it will be a 16-round jackpot You may comprise so that there may exist. As a result, it is possible to make it seem as if the 8-round jackpot has been promoted to the 16-round jackpot, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved. For example, you may alert | report combining these. In other words, if the same symbol is prepared for the first time due to the variation pattern effect, it is informed that the special symbol will shift to the high probability state after the jackpot ends, and if the same symbol is prepared for the second time, this jackpot will be received. You may comprise so that it may become a jackpot of 16 rounds.

  In addition to the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, there is also a probability changing winning opening that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the big winning is over, in addition to the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. May be. In other words, it may be configured to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot based on whether or not the ball wins the probability variation winning opening instead of the winning jackpot type. In addition, for example, a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided on the right side of the game board, and a probability changing winning opening is provided on the left side of the game board. During the big hit state, only one winning opening is provided for each round. You may comprise so that may be in an open state. And when the same design is prepared by the variation pattern effect, it may be configured to notify that the probability variation winning opening is opened in the next round. Thereby, the player can easily know the round to be aimed at the probability variation winning opening.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 77. In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot, the variation pattern effects are set in units of blocks configured by a plurality of variation pattern effects, and the variation pattern effects of the set aspect are executed as they are. It was. In addition, whether or not the variation pattern effect is appropriate is configured to be set based on the number of times of the normal symbol corresponding to the jackpot type and the number of times of the time notified by the variation pattern effect executed so far.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the variation period of the variation pattern effect set in units of blocks is combined based on the progress status of the jackpot so that the effect can be rewritten into one continuous notice effect. Yes. Further, in order to set the number of fluctuation pattern effects to be finally executed to 15 which is the prescribed number, the variation pattern effects corresponding to the number of times disappeared by rewriting to the continuous notice effect are newly set after the continuous notice effect. It is configured as follows.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes an appropriateness determination table 222c, a continuous notice random number table 222d, and a shortest period table. 222e, a variation pattern combination table 222f is provided, and a RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a time counter 223m, a surplus period storage area 223n, and a continuous notice counter 223o. Moreover, the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 45) performed by MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 differs from the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 included in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, the ROM 222 included in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a success / failure determination table 222c, a continuous notice random number table 222d, a shortest period table 222e, and a variation pattern combination table 222f. (See FIG. 67). In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, the RAM 223 included in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a time counter 223m, a surplus period storage area 223n, and a continuous notice counter 223o (FIG. 66). reference). About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, differences in the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. The success / failure determination table 222c is a table that defines the success / failure of each variation pattern effect, and a plurality of different patterns are defined for each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when a big hit state is achieved, one pattern is selected from the success / failure determination table 222c, and the number of times of variation pattern effects is used to preset the same pattern. By setting in advance a variation pattern effect in which symbols are aligned, it is possible to select an effect based on the result of the determination. Details of the success / failure determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table 222c. The success / failure determination table 222c defines a pattern that can be selected for each jackpot type, and the relationship between the number of changes for each pattern and the success / failure of the change pattern.

  For example, in the case of winning a jackpot A (10 hits in a short time), three types of success / failure patterns that can be selected from the success / failure determination table 222c are defined. Among these, for example, when pattern 1 is selected, the same symbols are arranged in the first variation pattern production, and are displayed by adding 10 times as the number of times of normal symbols (the upper portion of the third symbol display device 81). “Total 10 times” is displayed in the center area). On the other hand, in the second to fifteenth variation pattern effects, the symbols are not aligned, and the display value of the short time count of the normal symbols does not change.

  Also, for example, when winning the jackpot E (70 wins in a short time) and pattern 3 is selected, the first to twelfth variation pattern productions do not have the same pattern, and the number of times in the normal symbol is displayed as 0. Will remain. That is, “total 0 times” is continuously displayed in the area provided at the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Then, in the 13th to 15th variation pattern effects, the same symbols are arranged and displayed by adding the number of time reductions of 10, 10, and 50, respectively.

  In this way, by defining the determination table 222c that defines the result of the variation pattern effect in the ROM 222, and selecting the winning pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when winning the jackpot, When setting a block variation pattern effect, it is not necessary to draw and set each variation pattern effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the variation pattern effect mode of each block.

  Note that the mode of the success / failure determination table 222c is not limited to the pattern of the present embodiment. The total value of the number of time reductions to be notified may be arbitrarily determined within a range that matches the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. The continuous notice random number table 222d is a table for changing whether or not the variation pattern effect set in units of blocks is changed, and whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed within the range of the change period, and is provided in the RAM 223. The value of the continuous notice counter 223o and the availability of continuous notice are defined in association with each other. The continuous notice counter 223o is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 199, and is updated in the main process. Details of the continuous notice random number table 222d will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 69A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous notice random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the continuous notice random number table 222d defines the range of values of the continuous notice counter 223o. When the value of the continuous notice counter 223o falls within the range defined in the continuous notice random number table 222d, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  The continuous notice random number table 222d includes a table in the case where the same symbols are not aligned (that is, the number of times is not added) and a table in which the same symbols are aligned (that is, the number of times is added) as a result of the variation pattern effect. And the number of random numbers determined to execute the continuous notice effect included therein is set differently. In addition, the number of random numbers is set to be larger when the same symbol is aligned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the expectation that the same symbols are aligned is high just by generating a continuous notice effect, so that the player's interest in games can be improved. it can.

  Even when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the variation pattern effect that was originally set may be executed as it is without setting the continuous notice effect in consideration of the progress status of the jackpot. When executing the continuous notice effect, a period longer than the fluctuation period of the normal fluctuation pattern effect is set as the effect period. Therefore, depending on the progress of the jackpot, if the continuous notice effect is executed, the specified number of times (15 This is because there is a possibility that the execution of the fluctuation pattern effect may not be completed during the big hit state.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. The shortest period table 222e is a table that defines the shortest period from the start of jackpot to the start of each round. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the progress status of the jackpot is judged by comparing the shortest period table 222e and the elapsed time from the actual start of the jackpot, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. It is configured to do. Details of the shortest period table 222e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 69B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the shortest period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the shortest period table 222e defines the number of rounds and the shortest elapsed time at the start of each round. As described above, since it takes at least 6 seconds to launch 10 balls, the shortest period for digesting the round (that is, letting the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to win 10 balls) is 6 seconds. It is. The round feeling has an interval period of 1 second. Further, a period of 3 seconds for displaying the game description is set between the start of the jackpot and the start of the first round. In the shortest period table 222e, the shortest elapsed period at the start of each round is set based on these conditions.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the shortest period defined in the shortest period table 222e is compared with the actual elapsed period from the start of the jackpot, and what is the temporal margin for the shortest period It is configured so as to determine whether there is a continuous notice effect. For example, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the big hit at the start of the fourth round, it is determined that the margin is 6 seconds with respect to the shortest period of 24000 ms (24 seconds). Therefore, when setting the continuous notice effect, the effect is set in a range not exceeding 6 seconds.

  Regardless of how short the jackpot digestion period after setting the continuous notice effect is, the mode of the continuous notice effect is set up to the period of the margin secured before setting the continuous notice effect. It is possible to reliably complete the execution of the variation pattern effect of the specified number of times (15 times).

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. The variation pattern combination table 222f is a table used when combining the variation periods of a plurality of variation pattern effects set in units of blocks and overwriting and setting the continuous notice effect. Specifically, it is a table that prescribes how many variable periods allocated to the variable pattern effect can be combined. Details of the variation pattern combination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 69 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern combination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the fluctuation pattern combination table 222f includes a remainder period T indicating a difference between the shortest period defined in the shortest period table 222e and the actual elapsed period from the start of the jackpot. The maximum number of change periods assigned to change pattern effects is defined. For example, if the remainder period T is 2000 ms, it corresponds to T <3500 ms, so that the variable periods cannot be combined. On the other hand, for example, if the surplus period T is 8000 ms, it is within the range of 7000 ms ≦ T <10500 ms. Therefore, the variable period corresponding to the maximum of three variable pattern effects is combined, and the continuous notice effect is overwritten. Can do.

  As described above, when the continuous notice effect is set, the variable pattern effect is additionally set after the continuous notice effect so as to cover the number of fluctuation pattern effects reduced by overwriting. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern combination table 222f can prevent the newly set variation pattern effect from increasing excessively. Therefore, it can suppress that a jackpot state is complete | finished before execution of 15 times of fluctuation pattern effects is completed.

  Next, differences in the configuration of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. The time counter 223m is a counter that counts an elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. The above-described remainder period T is calculated by taking the difference between the count value of the elapsed time counter 223m and the shortest period specified in the shortest period table 222e. The value of the time counter 223m is referred to every time when a new round start timing is reached, and the remainder period T is calculated.

  The surplus period storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the surplus period T described above, and its value is updated each time a new round start timing is reached. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the continuous notice effect is based on the remainder period T stored in the remainder period storage area 223n and the above-described variation pattern combination table 222f. Set the mode.

  The continuous notice counter 223o is a counter used for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect. As described above, the continuous notice counter 223o is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 199, and is updated in the main process. By comparing the counter value of the continuous notice counter 223o with the continuous notice random number table 222d, it is determined whether or not to set the continuous notice effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70 to FIG. 73, the continuous notice effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 70 is a time chart showing the transition of the effect execution period before and after the continuous notice effect is set during the jackpot. FIG. 70A shows an example in which the setting of the continuous notice effect is determined at the timing of setting the third variation pattern effect of block 3, and FIG. It is an example when the setting of the continuous notice effect is determined at the timing of setting the pattern effect. 70 (a) and 70 (b), “Before change” shows the setting state of the variation pattern effect before setting the continuous notice effect, and “After change” indicates the change pattern effect that was originally set. The setting state when the setting is changed and the continuous notice effect is set is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the continuous notice effect is set at the timing of setting the third change pattern effect of block 3, the third change pattern effect “before change” and the fourth change pattern effect are set. The variation period assigned to the variation pattern effect is combined and newly set as a continuous notice effect of the effect period of 8000 ms (see “after change” in FIG. 70A). In addition, the production period allocated to the second variation pattern production (the third variation pattern production in block 3 and the fourth variation pattern production) is combined to become one continuous notice production. The variation pattern effect is reduced by one. In order to guarantee the variation pattern effect for one time, a variation pattern effect with a variation period of 3500 ms is newly set after the continuous notice effect. Then, after the newly set variation pattern effect of 3500 ms is completed, the block 4 is entered. That is, the timing at which the variation pattern effect of the block 4 is started is delayed by 3500 ms compared to “before change”.

  Similarly, with reference to FIG. 70 (b), the case where the continuous notice effect is set at the timing of setting the second variation pattern effect of block 3 will be described. In such a case, the variation period assigned to the second variation pattern effect “before the change”, the third variation pattern effect, and the fourth variation pattern effect are combined, and the continuous notice effect of the effect period of 11500 ms is combined. (See “After change” in FIG. 70B). In addition, the effect periods assigned to the three fluctuation pattern effects (the second change pattern effect of block 3, the third change pattern effect, and the fourth change pattern effect) are combined to produce one continuous notice effect. As a result, the variation pattern effect is substantially reduced by two. In order to guarantee the fluctuation pattern effect for two times, the fluctuation pattern effect for the fluctuation period of 2 times of 3500 ms is newly set after the continuous notice effect. Then, after the two newly set fluctuation pattern effects of 3500 ms are completed, the block 4 is entered. That is, the timing at which the variation pattern effect of the block 4 is started is delayed by 7000 ms compared to “before change”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the surplus period T is calculated from the shortest period table 222e and the count value of the time counter 223m, and based on the surplus period T, a variable period that can be combined (effect period) ) Is determined. Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 70A, the timing at which the variation pattern effect of block 4 is started is delayed by 3500 ms compared to “before change”, or the timing of block 4 is changed as in the case of FIG. Even if the timing at which the variation pattern effect is started is delayed by 7000 ms compared to “before change”, fifteen variation pattern effects can be reliably completed within the jackpot period.

  Next, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous notice effect is executed will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this specific example, the case where the variable periods assigned to the three fluctuation pattern effects shown in FIG. 70 (b) are combined and a continuous notice effect is newly set in the combined period will be described as an example. To do.

  First, FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of the continuous notice effect. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the display contents of the three areas provided in the upper part of the third symbol display device 81 are the same as the normal variation pattern effects executed during the jackpot. The difference from the normal variation pattern effect is that the two leaves are blown by the wind and crossed while the left, middle, and left symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. By displaying the leaves, the player can recognize that the state is different from the usual state, and the expectation that the symbols are arranged can be enhanced.

  Each symbol sequence that is variably displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the effect period set for executing the continuous notice effect. Specifically, before the continuous notice effect is set, it is stopped and displayed at the timing of the end of the change of the change pattern effect that was originally set. For example, in the case of the example of FIG. 70B, the variation period of the variation pattern effect set to “Before change” is 3500 ms, so the first variation effect of the continuous notice effect is also stopped and displayed after 3500 ms elapses. Is done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71B, the stop symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop form (chance) in which the left symbol is “3”, the central symbol is “4”, and the right symbol is “1”. Furthermore, the characters “Continue” are displayed on the left side of the left symbol. By these, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous notice effect is being executed.

  After the chance is stopped, the variable display of each symbol row is started again (see FIG. 72 (a)). In addition, while each symbol row is variably displayed, an effect is performed in which books, umbrellas, palm leaves, etc. are blown away by the wind. That is, by executing a wind effect stronger than the first variation effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the degree of expectation that the symbols are aligned is high. Therefore, a player's expectation can be raised and the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, “second time” is displayed on the left side of the left symbol row. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that this is the second continuous notice effect. It should be noted that the remaining number of variation pattern effects displayed in the upper right region of the third symbol display device 81 does not change. If the configuration is such that the remaining number of fluctuation pattern effects is reduced each time the chance eyes are stopped by the continuous notice effect, the player may feel that the opportunity to add is reduced. Therefore, there is a risk that the longer the continuous notice effect lasts, the player may feel that the loss has occurred. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the chance eyes are stopped and displayed in the continuous notice effect, and the change starts again, the remaining number of change pattern effects is not reduced, and the player is injured. It suppresses making you feel that it was done.

  Similarly to the first variation display of the continuous notice effect, the second variation display of the symbol of the continuous notice effect (see FIG. 72 (a)) and the variation period of the variation pattern effect set to “Before change” It continues for the same fluctuation period (3500 ms in the case of the example in FIG. 70B), and at the end of the fluctuation period, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a chance-like stop (see FIG. 72B).

  After the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the variable display of each symbol row is started again (see FIG. 73 (a)). Further, while each symbol row is variably displayed, an effect that a tornado is generated on the left and right of the symbol row is executed. That is, by executing a tornado effect that is stronger than the first and second variation effects, it can be suggested to the player that the degree of expectation that the symbols are aligned is high. Therefore, a player's expectation can be raised and the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  In the third symbol change display (see FIG. 73 (a)) of the continuous notice effect, the left symbol sequence and the right symbol sequence are first stopped and displayed with the same symbol (see FIG. 73 (b)). The central symbol row is stopped and displayed. If the three symbols are aligned with the same symbol, the number of times of the normal symbol is increased. If the symbols are not aligned with the same symbol (if they are out of place), the number of times of the normal symbol is not changed. Note that the third variation display of the continuous notice effect is performed in the same variation period as that of the variation pattern effect set to “before change” as in the first and second times ( (4500 ms in the example of FIG. 70B).

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  Of these command determination processes (S1711), the processes of S1801 to S1816 and S1819 execute the same processes as the processes of S1801 to S1816 and S1819 of the command determination process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. In the command determination process in the second embodiment, if it is determined in step S1814 that a round number command has been received (S1814: Yes), then the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1821). ). Then, based on the minimum elapsed period corresponding to the extracted number of rounds in the shortest period table 222e (see FIG. 69B) and the elapsed period from the start of the big hit counted by the time counter 223m, the remainder period T is calculated and stored in the remainder period storage area 223n (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1815.

  By calculating the surplus period T by the processing of S1821 and S1822 and storing it in the surplus period storage area 223n, fluctuating 15 times within the jackpot period in the later-described notice effect setting process (see FIG. 77). The mode of the continuous notice effect can be determined within a range where the pattern effect can be completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a main process of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, in steps S1701 to S1712 and S1714 to S1719, S1701 to S1712 of the main processing (see FIG. 45) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S1714 to S1719 are executed. Then, in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1712 is completed, the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1721) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 76, the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1721) is a process for setting an aspect of an interesting effect such as a variation pattern effect performed during the jackpot. When this pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1721) is completed, the process proceeds to S1714.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the pseudo fluctuation setting process 2 (S1721) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1721).

  Of the pseudo-variation setting process 2, the same processes as S2001-S2018 of the pseudo-variation setting process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment are executed in each process of S2001-S2018. In the pseudo variation setting process 2 in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2006 that the game explanation flag 223g is not on (that is, is off) (S2006: No), the notice effect setting process (S2021). ) Is executed.

  This notice effect setting process (S2021) is a process of setting a continuous notice effect by combining the variable periods assigned to a plurality of change pattern effects set in block units during the jackpot. When the notice effect setting process (S2021) ends, the process proceeds to S2010.

  Next, details of the notice effect setting process (S2021) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this notice effect setting processing (S2021).

  In the notice effect setting process (S2021), first, it is determined whether or not a continuous notice effect is set (S4401). If it is determined that the continuous notice effect has already been set, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the continuous notice effect is not set, it is then determined whether or not the change time of the change pattern effect has passed (S4402).

  As a result of the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation pattern effect has not elapsed (that is, the variation pattern effect is being performed) (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (S4402: Yes), the variation to be executed next based on the success / failure determination table 222c in order to determine whether or not to set the continuous notice effect. After determining whether or not there is an additional pattern effect, the value of the continuous notice counter 223o is compared with the random number value defined in the continuous notice random number table 222d (S4403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223o is within the range of random values for executing the continuous notice effect (S4404), and if it is outside the range of random values for executing the continuous notice effect (S4404: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the range of the random number value for executing the continuous notice effect (S4404: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern effect that has not been executed still remains twice or more in the current block. (S4405) If it is determined that there is no more than two times (ie, no more than once) (S4405: No), there is no sufficient period for setting the continuous notice effect, so this process Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that there are two or more unexecuted variation pattern effects remaining (S4405: Yes), the remainder period T stored in the remainder period storage area 223n and the variation pattern combination table. Based on 222f, the maximum value of the number of combinations when the variable periods are combined is extracted. Then, the variation period of the unexecuted variation pattern effect is combined with the extracted maximum value as the upper limit (S4406). For example, 2 is extracted as the maximum value of the number of combinations from the variation pattern combination table 222f in a state where the variation period of the first variation pattern effect of block 3 has ended and three unexecuted variation pattern effects remain. If it is, the fluctuation periods assigned to the two fluctuation pattern effects are combined.

  After the processing of S4406, a continuous notice effect with the combined period as the variable period is set (S4407), and a new variable pattern effect with a variable period of 3500 ms is created by the number of variable pattern effects reduced by the combination of the variable periods. Is set (S4408), and this process ends.

  By executing this process, the same symbol is aligned for a longer period than the normal variation pattern effect without reducing the number of variation pattern effects that are executed during the jackpot (that is, the number of times of normal symbols is increased). It is possible to execute a continuous notice effect with a high expectation). Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, based on the progress status of the jackpot, it is possible to rewrite the effect into one continuous notice effect by combining the change period of the change pattern effect set in units of blocks. It is configured as follows. Further, whether or not the fluctuating pattern effect is 15 times is set at the start of the jackpot, and the execution of the continuous notice effect is easily determined when the same symbols are arranged in the variable pattern effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the player strongly expect an extra by executing the continuous notice effect. Therefore, the interest of the player for the jackpot game can be improved.

  Further, in order to set the number of fluctuation pattern effects to be finally executed to 15 which is the prescribed number, the variation pattern effects corresponding to the number of times disappeared by rewriting to the continuous notice effect are newly set after the continuous notice effect. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being ended without executing the prescribed number of variation pattern effects and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, when performing the continuous notice effect, since the effect period is longer than the sum of the effect periods of the effect pattern effect originally set in units of blocks, the effect of the effect of the change pattern finishes early during the jackpot, and the player It is possible to suppress feeling bored.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the continuous notice effect is configured to be set within the range of the block in which the change pattern effect is set. You may comprise so that it may set. For example, the variation period of the 4th variation pattern effect of 2 blocks and the variation period of the 1st to 3rd variation pattern effect of 3 blocks are combined to produce the total of the variation periods of these 4 variation pattern effects. A continuous notice effect as a period may be newly set. In this case, the variation period of the first to fourth variation pattern effects of the three blocks may be selected when the variation period of the third variation pattern effect of the two blocks, which is the timing for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect. . Then, the effect period of the continuous notice effect may be set based on the change period of each change pattern effect of the three selected blocks and the change period of the fourth change pattern effect of the two blocks that were originally set.

  When setting a continuous notice effect across blocks, a continuous notice effect may be set across three blocks. In this case, before setting the continuous notice effect, the mode of the next block and the next two blocks are selected, and the continuous notice effect is set based on the selected block form. Good.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect that the wind gradually increases as the number of times of the continuous notice progresses is executed as the effect of the continuous notice effect. It may be arbitrarily determined as long as the expectation degree of the increase is increased as the number of times is increased. For example, in a continuous notice effect, an effect that a person crosses may be executed, and the number of people who pass through each time the number of continuous notices increases may be increased.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the aspect of the continuous notice effect is set in a lump, but it is not limited to this. For example, a continuous lottery may be performed every time the chance is stopped, and if the continuous lottery is omitted, the continuous notice effect is terminated, and the variation pattern effect originally set in units of blocks may be executed. .

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the continuous notice effect is set by combining the variable periods of the change pattern effects, and the change pattern effects corresponding to the number of times reduced by the combination are additionally set. It is not something that can be done. For example, when a continuous notice effect is set, a new block may be added. Further, for example, the configuration of the block to be set next (the number of variation pattern effects forming the block) may be rearranged.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment is configured to set the mode of the variation pattern effect in units of blocks when a plurality of variation pattern effects are executed during the jackpot. The present invention is not limited to the big hit state, and can be applied to the case where the variation pattern effect is executed a specified number of times in a state where the period from the start to the end changes depending on the condition.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the variation pattern effect mode during the jackpot is set in units of blocks, the next block is set based on the end of the previous block. However, it may be configured to set all the blocks at once. The timing to be set in a lump may be at the start of a jackpot or at the end of the game description. By setting all at once, it is possible to produce an effect with a story or produce an effect with a sharpness with respect to the fluctuating pattern effect for 15 times. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the setting of the entertainment effect such as the variation pattern effect during the big hit is set based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113. It is not something that can be done. For example, the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 may be used for setting.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group> (Adjust the period of pseudo-ST depending on the progress of jackpot game)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling the display so as to perform display, and period specifying means capable of specifying one or more dynamic display periods of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means. The specifying means specifies the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information and the period of dynamic display of the identification information based on the progress status of the privilege gaming state when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. When the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information. The period of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means is specified one or more times by the period specifying means. When a specific condition is satisfied, the number of times of dynamic display of identification information and the period of dynamic display of each identification information are specified by the period specifying means based on the progress status of the privilege gaming state.

  Thereby, the dynamic display of identification information can be suitably performed according to the period of a privilege game state. That is, although the dynamic display of identification information is being executed, the privilege gaming state ends, or the dynamic display of all identification information ends and the privilege gaming state ends for a long time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the period specifying unit is based on each period of the dynamic display of the identification information set previously in one of the privilege gaming states. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the period of dynamic display of the identification information is specified one or more times.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, the period specifying means dynamically displays the identification information based on each period of the dynamic display of the identification information set previously in the one privilege gaming state. A period is specified one or more times.

  Thereby, since each period of the dynamic display of the identification information set previously can be referred to, only the long variation pattern effect is continuously set, and the bonus game is ended before the set variation pattern effect ends. It can suppress that a state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a progress status determining unit that determines a progress status of the privilege gaming state, and the period specifying unit dynamically determines the dynamics of the identification information for a predetermined number of times in one privilege gaming state. The display period is specified, and based on the determination result by the progress status determination means, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information executed last in the privilege gaming state is specified. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the progress status of the privilege gaming state is determined by the progress status determining means. In one award gaming state, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the identification information is specified by the period specifying means, and finally in the award gaming state based on the determination result by the progress state determining means. A period of dynamic display of identification information to be executed is specified.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times can be surely executed in one privilege gaming state, the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed less than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to suppress the end. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine A3, an effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information is provided after the predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the progress status determination means. A gaming machine A4, comprising display determination means for determining whether or not to display the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed after the predetermined number of times of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the progress status determination means. Since the display determination means determines whether or not to display different effects on the display means, even if the predetermined number of times of dynamic display of the identification information ends early, the player in the remaining privilege gaming state There is an effect that it is possible to suppress boring.

  In the gaming machine A1, a entrance that allows a game ball to enter, a payout means for paying out a predetermined quantity of valuable objects when a game ball enters the entrance, A ball entry permission means for setting the state of the entry ball mouth to a state in which the entry of the game ball is permitted a predetermined number of times, and the period specifying means is predetermined in one of the bonus game states. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it specifies a period of dynamic display of the identification information for a given number of times.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the payout means. During the bonus game state, the entrance permission means sets the entrance state to a state where entry of game balls is permitted a predetermined number of times. A period of dynamic display of identification information of a predetermined number of times in one privilege gaming state is specified.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information in the privilege gaming state from being changed depending on how the player launches the game ball.

  In the gaming machine A5, the period specifying unit sets the total number of the dynamic display periods of the identification information for the predetermined number of times to a state in which the entrance permitting unit is permitted to enter a game ball. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it can be specified as a period shorter than the minimum value.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, the total number of periods of the dynamic display of the identification information of a predetermined number of times is the state in which the entry permission means is permitted to enter the game ball. The period can be specified by the period specifying means as a period shorter than the minimum value of the period to be completed, so that the dynamic display of the identification information a predetermined number of times can be completed while the entrance into the entrance is permitted. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, when the period specifying unit specifies the period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed last among the predetermined number of dynamic displays of the identification information, A gaming machine A7, characterized in that the period is specified based on the progress of the privilege gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the period of the dynamic display of identification information that is executed last among the predetermined number of times of dynamic display of identification information is the period specifying means. Is specified based on the progress status of the award gaming state, the dynamic display of the identification information executed last can be surely ended within the period of the award gaming state. effective.

<Characteristic group B> (Block rearrangement)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. A plurality of display control means for controlling display to be performed and a group of dynamic display periods that are periods during which dynamic display of one or more of the identification information can be executed are set within a period during which the privilege gaming state is executed. Period group setting means, order determining means for determining a setting order of the plurality of dynamic display period groups set by the period group setting means, and the dynamic display period group set by the period group setting means And a period specifying means for specifying the period of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the game machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. The display control means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information when the benefit game transition means shifts to the privilege game state. A plurality of dynamic display period groups, which are periods during which dynamic display of one or a plurality of identification information can be executed, are set within the period in which the privilege gaming state is executed by the period group setting means. The setting order of the plurality of dynamic display period groups set by the period group setting means is determined by the order determining means. Based on the dynamic display period group set by the period group setting means, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information is specified by the period specifying means.

  Thereby, since the total of the dynamic display periods of a plurality of identification information executed in the privilege gaming state can be made difficult to vary, the privilege gaming state ends before the dynamic display of the identification information ends. This can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the period group setting means includes a first dynamic display period group in which identification information indicating predetermined information is easily displayed in the dynamic display of the one or more identification information to be executed, Set at least a second dynamic display period group in which identification information indicating the predetermined information is less likely to be displayed in the dynamic display of the one or more identification information to be executed than the first dynamic display period group A gaming machine B2 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first dynamic display period group in which identification information indicating predetermined information is easily displayed in the dynamic display of one or more identification information to be executed, and the first dynamic display period group. Since the second dynamic display period group in which identification information indicating predetermined information is difficult to be displayed in the dynamic display of the one or more identification information to be displayed is set by the period group setting means, one privilege gaming state The degree of expectation that identification information indicating predetermined information can be displayed can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, in the first dynamic display period group, it is easier to specify the dynamic display of the identification information having a longer period by the period specifying means than in the second dynamic display period group. A gaming machine B3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, in the first dynamic display period group, the dynamic display of identification information having a longer period is specified by the period specifying means than in the second dynamic display group. Since it is easy to be performed, the period with the high expectation degree in which the identification information which shows predetermined information is displayed can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the order determining means determines a setting order of the plurality of dynamic display period groups based on specific conditions.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the order determination unit determines the setting order of the plurality of dynamic display period groups based on the specific condition. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to change the gaming property of the privilege gaming state.

  The gaming machine B4 includes operation means that can be operated by the player, and the order determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the player inputs to the operation means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, it is determined that a specific condition is established by the order determining means when there is a player input operation to the operating means operable by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a special game state with a gameability suitable for each player's taste simply by operating the operation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the dynamic display period group is defined for each dynamic display group type in which the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information is different, and the period group setting means includes: The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in one privilege gaming state, the dynamic display period group is set by a predetermined number of times for each of the dynamic display group types.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, a dynamic display period group is defined for each dynamic display group type in which the number of times of dynamic display of identification information that constitutes it is different. In one privilege gaming state, the dynamic display period group is set by the period group setting means by a predetermined number of times for each dynamic display group type.

  Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information of the same number of times can be set every time in the privilege gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by changing the number of times that the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  In the gaming machine B6, a entrance into which a game ball can enter, a payout means for paying out a predetermined amount of valuable objects when the game ball enters the entrance, An entry permission means for setting the state of the entry ball mouth to a state in which entry of a game ball is permitted a predetermined number of times, and the period specifying means is the movement set by the period group setting means. Based on the target display period group, the total period of the dynamic display of the identified identification information is defined as a period shorter than the minimum value of the period in which the entrance permission means is allowed to enter the game ball A gaming machine B7 characterized by being identifiable.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance where a game ball can enter, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the payout means. During the special game state, the entrance permission means sets the entrance state to a state where entry of the game ball is permitted a predetermined number of times. The total period of the dynamic display period of the identification information specified based on the dynamic display period group set by the period group setting means is a period in which the entrance of the game ball is permitted by the entrance permission means It is specified by the period specifying means as a period shorter than the minimum value.

  Thereby, before the dynamic display of all the set identification information ends, it is possible to suppress the end of the period in which the entrance of the game ball is permitted by the entrance permission means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the game machine includes a progress status determining unit that determines a progress status of the privilege gaming state, and the period specifying unit is a dynamic display of the identification information that is executed last in the privilege gaming state. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that the period is specified based on the determination result by the progress status determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are produced. That is, the progress status of the privilege gaming state is determined by the progress status determining means. The period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed last in the privilege gaming state is specified by the period specifying unit based on the determination result by the progress status determining unit.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed last can be surely ended before the privilege gaming state is ended, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the period specifying unit is set next every time the period of dynamic display of the identification information specified based on the dynamic display period group ends. Based on the dynamic display period group, a period for dynamic display of the identification information is specified, respectively, and the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, every time the period of dynamic display of identification information specified based on the dynamic display period group ends, Based on the set dynamic display period group, the period of the dynamic display of the identification information is specified by the period specifying unit, so that the processing addition by the process for specifying the period of the dynamic display is distributed. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic C group> (Combine the production period)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling display to be performed, and first period setting means capable of collectively setting a display period of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means for a plurality of times, A second period in which the display period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set in a display period in which all or some of the multiple dynamic displays set by the first period setting unit are collected. A gaming machine C1 having setting means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the display means displays the identification information dynamically when the benefit game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is controlled by the control means. The display period for the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means by the display control means is set in batches for a plurality of times by the first period setting means. The display period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the first period setting means in a display period in which the number of times of all or part of the set dynamic display is summarized.

  As a result, an effect of a relatively long display period, that is, a dynamic display period of identification information for a plurality of times, can be executed, so that the effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C1 includes a determination unit that determines a progress status of the privilege gaming state, and the second period setting unit is configured to include a plurality of sets set by the first period setting unit based on a determination result by the determination unit Among the dynamic display of the identification information, the display period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set in a display period in which all or a part of the dynamic display of the identification information is combined. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the progress status of the privilege gaming state is determined by the determining means, and based on the determination result by the determining means, among the dynamic displays of the plurality of identification information set by the first period setting means, The display period for the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the second period setting means in a display period in which the number of times for all or a part is collected.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the freedom degree of the period which performs an effect can be raised.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first period setting means specifies a period of dynamic display of the identification information for a predetermined number of times in one privilege gaming state. Game machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first period setting unit specifies the period of dynamic display of the identification information for a predetermined number of times in one privilege gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of times that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed can be made constant.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the display period of the dynamic display is set by the second period setting unit, the first period setting unit performs the dynamic display of the identification information for the number of times reduced by the grouping. A gaming machine C4 characterized by setting a display period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, when the display period of the dynamic display is set by the second period setting means, the first period setting means for the number of times reduced by the summarization. Since the display period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set, the number of times that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed can be made constant regardless of whether the display period is set by the second period setting means. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second period setting unit does not execute setting of dynamic display of the identification information when the determination result of the determination unit is a predetermined determination result. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, when the judgment result of the judgment means is a predetermined judgment result, the second period setting means performs the dynamic display of the identification information. Since the setting is not executed, there is an effect that a plurality of privilege game states having different game characteristics can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C1 includes a period determining unit that determines the period of the privilege gaming state by dividing the period into a plurality of periods, and the first period setting unit is configured for each period determined by the period determining unit. The game machine C6 is characterized in that a period for dynamically displaying the identification information is set.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the period of the privilege gaming state is divided into a plurality of periods and is determined by the period determining means. For each period determined by the determining means, a period for dynamically displaying the identification information is set by the first period setting means.

  Thereby, since the period of the dynamic display of the identification information can be set in the period according to the progress status of the privilege gaming state, the relationship between the period of the privilege gaming state and the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed is preferable. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine C6, the second period setting unit is configured to be able to set the display period of the dynamic display over a plurality of periods determined by the period determination unit. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, since the display period of the dynamic display is set by the second period setting unit over a plurality of periods determined by the period determination unit, the degree of freedom of effect selection displayed on the display unit is further increased. There is an effect that it can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C6 or C7, the period discriminating means sets the remaining period of the award gaming state to one or more new periods based on the fact that the display period of the dynamic display is set by the second period setting means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that it is set for each of the periods.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6 or C7, the period of the remaining award gaming state is determined by the determining means based on the fact that the display period of the dynamic display is set by the second period setting means. Since it is set separately for one or a plurality of new periods, there is an effect that the relationship between the period of the privilege gaming state and the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed can be made suitable.

  In the gaming machine C6 or C7, the period determining unit is configured to determine at least one period among the plurality of determined periods based on the display period of the dynamic display being set by the second period setting unit. A gaming machine C9 having a variable length and newly discriminating.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6 or C7, at least one of the plurality of periods determined based on the fact that the display period of dynamic display is set by the second period setting means. Since the period is newly determined by changing the length, there is an effect that the relationship between the period of the privilege gaming state and the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed can be made suitable.

<Feature D group> (The number of pseudo-variations can be changed according to the progress of the jackpot game)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling the display to perform display, number of times determination means for determining the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information to be executed in the privilege gaming state, and movement of the identification information determined by the number of times determination means. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a number-of-times changing means for changing the number of automatic displays based on a predetermined opportunity.

  According to the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. When the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display control means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information. The number of times of dynamic display of the identification information executed in the privilege gaming state is determined by the number determination means. The number of times of dynamic display of the identification information determined by the number-of-times determining means is changed by the number of times changing means based on a predetermined opportunity.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the relationship between the period of a privilege game state and the period when the dynamic display of identification information is performed can be made suitable.

<Characteristic E group> (Adjusting the fluctuation time based on the previous jackpot time)
When a transition is made to the privilege game state by the privilege game transition means for transitioning to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the predetermined condition, a storage means for storing information, and the privilege game transition means, Display control means for controlling the display means to dynamically display the identification information, period measurement means for measuring a period from the start to the end of the privilege gaming state, and the period measured by the period measurement means Storage control means for controlling to store in the storage means, and display period specifying means capable of specifying the display period of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means in a plurality of batches, the display The game machine E1 characterized in that the period specifying means specifies a display period of the dynamic display of the plurality of identification information based on the period stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. The display control means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information when the benefit game transition means shifts to the privilege game state. The period from the start to the end of the privilege gaming state is measured by the period measuring means. The storage control unit controls the period measured by the period measurement unit so as to be stored in the storage unit. The display period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be displayed on the image display means is specified by the display period specifying means at once for a plurality of times, and the dynamic display of the plurality of identification information is displayed based on the period stored in the storage means A period is specified.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is executed can be made suitable in consideration of the duration of the privilege gaming state that has been transferred to before.

<Feature F group> (Determining whether or not to add the number of fluctuations in a predetermined round)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling to display, setting means for collectively setting a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means for a predetermined number of times, and the privilege gaming state is started In addition to the number of times set by the setting means, one or a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information is set based on the determination means for determining the progress of the game after being played, and the determination result by the determination means A game machine F1 comprising execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. The display control means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state. The dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means is collectively set for a predetermined number of times by the setting means. The progress of the game since the bonus game state is started is determined by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the execution determination unit determines whether to set the dynamic display of the identification information one or more times in addition to the number of times set by the setting unit.

  As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information more times than the predetermined number of times is executed, so that the player can feel that the chance of lottery has increased. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Pseudo-variable multiple batch mode is stored in a table)
The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling display to be performed; setting means for setting the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means in one or more batches; and a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information A mode defining unit that defines a mode of dynamic display of the identification information in a plurality of units with one batch as a unit, and the setting unit sets the dynamic display of the identification information in a plurality of batches In addition, the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that one unit is selected and set from among the dynamic display modes of the identification information of a plurality of units defined by the mode defining means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the special game transition means shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. The display control means controls the display means to dynamically display the identification information when the benefit game transition means shifts to the privilege game state. The dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means is set by the setting means for one or a plurality of times. A mode of the dynamic display of the identification information of a plurality of units is defined in the mode defining means with a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information as one unit. When the dynamic display of the identification information is set for a plurality of times by the setting means, one unit is selected and set from the dynamic display aspects of the identification information of a plurality of units defined by the aspect defining means. .

  As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined and set every time.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
S212 Bonus game transition means S2008, S2018 Period identification means S2201, S2203, S2205 Progress status determination means

Claims (3)

The privilege game transition means for shifting to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state, the display means dynamically displays the identification information. Display control means for controlling display to be performed;
A period specifying unit capable of specifying one or more times of a period of dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display unit by the display control unit;
The period specifying means specifies the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information and the period of dynamic display of the identification information based on the progress status of the privilege gaming state when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that is characterized by   When the specific condition is satisfied, the period specifying unit is configured to move the identification information based on each period of the dynamic display of the identification information set in advance in one reward gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the period of the target display is specified one or more times. A progress status determining means for determining the progress status of the privilege gaming state;
The period specifying means includes
1 for specifying a period of dynamic display of the identification information for a predetermined number of times in the privilege gaming state,
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein a period of dynamic display of the identification information executed last in the privilege gaming state is specified based on a determination result by the progress state determination means. Machine.

Images